Toshiba 56HM195 User Manual DLP PTV Manuals And Guides L0520078

TOSHIBA DLP Television Manual L0520078 TOSHIBA DLP Television Owner's Manual, TOSHIBA DLP Television installation guides

User Manual: Toshiba 56HM195 56HM195 TOSHIBA DLP PTV - Manuals and Guides View the owners manual for your TOSHIBA DLP PTV #56HM195. Home:Electronics Parts:Toshiba Parts:Toshiba DLP PTV Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 112 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

HIBA

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

Dear Customer,

Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba TV.This manual will

help you use tile many exciting features of your new TV.

Before operating the TV, please read this manual

completely, and keep it nearby for future reference.

Safety Precautions

WARN ING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR

MOISTURE.

WARNING

WARNING:TO REDUCETHE RISK OF ELECTRICSHOCK,

DO NOTREMOVECOVER(OR BACK).NO USER-

SERVICEABLEPARTSINSIDE. REFERSERVICINGTO

QUALIFIEDSERVICEPERSONNEL.(Thisdoesnotapplyto"Lamp

unitreplacementandcare"ellpages103-105ofthismanual.)

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the

presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the

product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude

to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle, is

intended to alert the user to the presence of irr_portant

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the

literature accompanying the appliance.

CAUTION: HOT SURFACE! iA,,

The temperature of the lamp _/_\

immediately after use /_ _,,

exceeds 392°F (2go°C).

Touching the lamp before it has cooled will result in severe

burns. ALLOW THE LAMP TO COOL FOR AT LEAST ONE [1)

HOUR BEFORE REPLACING IT.

The lamp in this product has a limited service life. The length of

service life varies depending on product use and user settings.

If you use the lamp beyond its service life:

• you may notice a reduction in the colors and/or brightness of

the picture, at which time you should replace the lamp unit; and

• the strength of the quartz glass in the lamp will be reduced

and the lamp may rupture. If the lamp ruptures, the TV will

not operate until the lamp unit is replaced.

• Dispose of the used lamp unit by the approved method for your

area.

See "Lamp unit replacement and care"

on pages 103-105.

Note: The lamp unit contains mercury.

Disposal of mercury may be regulated due to

environmental considerations. Fordisposal or recycling

information, contact your local authorities or the Electronic

Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).

NOTE: NEVER CONNECT THIS TV

TO A PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC).

THIS TV IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE WITH A PC.

#01E 0024 04 566272HM195 2

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

NOTICE OF POSSIBLE TV STAND INSTABILITY

CAUTION: This television is for use only with

the Toshiba stand listed below. Use with other

carts or stands is capable of resulting in instability

causing possible injury.

Television Stand Model

56H M 195 ST5685

62H M 195 ST6285

72HM195 ST7285

NOTE TO CATV INSTALLERS IN THE U.SJ_.

This is a reminder to call the CATV system installer's attention to Article

820-40 of the U.S. NEC, which provides guidelines for proper grounding

and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to

the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry

as practical. For additional antenna grounding information, see items 27

and 28 on page 4.

Child Safety

It Makes A Difference

Where Your TV Stands

Congratulationsonyour purchase=.

As youenjoyyour new TV,keep these safetytips in mind:

Thelssue

If you are like most consumers,you havea TV inyour home. Many homes,

in fact, havemorethan one TV.

The hometheater entertainmentexperienceis a growing trend, and larger

TVsare popular purchases;however,theyare not alwayssupportedon

the properTV stands.

L_ SometimesTVsare improperlysecuredor inappropriately

situatedon dressers,bookcases,shelves,desks,audio speakers,

chests,or carts.Asa result,TVsmayfall over,causing

unnecessaryinjury.

Toshiba Cares!

Ej The consumer electronicsindustry is committedto

making homeentertainmentenjoyableand safe.

GTheConsumerElectronicsAssociationformed the

HomeEntertainmentSupportSafety Committee,

comprisedof TV and consumerelectronicsfurniture

manufacturers,to advocatechildren'ssafety and educate

consumersand their families about televisionsafety.

Tune Into Safety

L; OnesizedoesNOTfit all!Useappropriatefurniture large enougbto

supportthe weight of yourTV Candotherelectronic components).

Ej Useappropriateangle braces,straps, and anchorsto secure your furniture

to the wall [but neverscrew anythingdirectlyinto the TV).

L; Carefullyreadand understandthe otherenclosedinstructionsfor proper

useof this product.

L; Do not allowchildren to climb on or playwith furniture and TVs.

L; Avoidplacing anyitem on top of your TV Csuchasa VCR,remote control,

or toy) that a curious child mayreachfor.

L; Rememberthat children can becomeexcitedwhile watching a program

and can potentiallypush or pull a TV over.

Ej Shareoursafety messageabout this hidden hazardof the home with

your family and friends. Thank you!

2500 Wilson Blvd.

Arlington,VA 22201U.S.A.

Tel.703-907-7600 Fax703-907-7690

www.CE.org

CEAis the Sponsol;Producet and

:_ o#_t,,A_,<,.4t _ Managerof theIntelnationalCE5e'

7/28/05, 4:06 PM F

Important Safety Instructions

Read these instructions.

Keep these instructions.

Heed all warnings.

Follow all instructions.

Do not use this apparatus near water.

Clean only with adry cloth.

Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

8) Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,

heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including

amplifiers) that produce heat.

9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding type plug. A polarized plug has two blades

with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has

two blades and a third grounding Wideblade

prong. The wide blade or the third

prong are provided for your safety.

If the provided plug does not fit into

your outleL consult an electrician

for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10) Protect the power cord from being

walked on or pinched, particularly at

plugs, convenience receptacles, and

the point where it exits the apparatus.

11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the

manufacturer.

12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table specified by the

manufacturer, or sold with the

apparatus. When a cart is used, use

caution when moving the cart/apparatus

combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or

when unused for long periods of time.

1/4)Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

Servicing is required when the apparatus has been

damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug

is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen

into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to

rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been

dropped.

14a) Item 14does not apply to "Lamp unit replacement and

care" on pages 103-105 of this manual.

14b) CAUTION: If the TV is dropped and the cabinet or

enclosure surface has been damaged or the TV does not

operate normally, take the following precautions:

• ALWAYS turn off the TV and unplug the power cord to

avoid possible electric shock or fire.

• To prevent personal injury, never handle the damaged

television.

• ALWAYS contact a service technician to inspect the TV

any time it has been damaged or dropped.

15) CAUTION: To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not

use the polarized plug with an extension cord, receptacle,

or other outlet unless the blades can be inserted completely

to prevent blade exposure.

#01E 002-004 566272HM195 3

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

16) WARNING: This product contains alamp to project

the picture, and requires special safety precautions:

• See pages 103-105 for instructions on lamp unit

replacement and care.

•DO NOT attempt to service this product except as

specified on pages 103-105. The only user-

serviceable item in this product is the lamp unit.

Installation,Care, and Service

Installation

Follow these recommendations and precautions and heed all

warnings when installing your TV:

17) Never modify this equipment. Changes or modifications

may void: a) the warranty, and b) the user's authority to

operate this equipment under the rules of the Federal

Communications Commission.

18) DANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL

INJURY, DEATH, OR EQUIPMEN- _l_,_k

DAMAGE! Never place the TV on

an unstable cart, stand, or table. The TV

may fall, causing serious personal injury,

death, or serious damage to the TV.

19) Never place or store the TV in direct sunlight; hoL humid

areas; areas subject to excessive dust or vibration; or

locations with temperatures at or below 41°F (5°C).

20) Always place the TV on the floor or a sturdy, level, stable

surface that can support the weight of the unit.

21) Never expose the apparatus to dripping or splashing or

place items such as vases, aquariums, any other item filled

with liquid, or candles on top of the TV.

22) Always place the back of the television at least one (1)

inch away from any vertical surface (such as a wall) to

allow proper ventilation.

23) Never block or cover the slots or openings in the TV

cabinet back, bottom, and sides. Never place the TV:

•on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface;

• too close to drapes, curtains, or walls; or

• in a confined space such as a bookcase, built-in cabinet,

or any other place with poor ventilation.

The slots and openings are provided to protect the TV

from overheating and to help maintain reliable operation

of the TV.

24) Never allow anything to rest on or roll over the power

cord, and never place the TV where the power cord is

subject to wear or abuse.

25) Never overload wall outlets and extension cords.

26) Always operate this equipment from a 120 VAC, 60 Hz

power source only.

(continued on nextpage)

7/28/05, 4:06 PM F

Installation (continued from previous page)

27) Always make sure the antenna system is properly

grounded to provide adequate protection against voltage

surges and built-up static charges (see Section 810 of the

National Electric Code),

j Antenna lead-in wire

/Antenna discharge unit

/(NECSection 810-20)

conductors

ElectHc_me eqmpment._serviceequipment )

e Power service grounding

/elect[odesystem (NECArt 250 Part-H)

,,dolam sY +

28)_ANGER: RISK OF SERIOUS PERSONAL

INJURY OR DEATH!

• Use extrerne care to rnake sure you are never in

a position where your body (or any item you are in contact

with, such as a ladder or screwdriver) can accidentally

touch overhead power lines. Never locate the antenna

near overhead power lines or other electrical circuits.

• Never attempt to install any of the following during

lightning activity: a) an antenna system; or b) cables,

wires, or any home theater component connected to an

antenna or phone system.

Care

For better performance and safer operation of your TOSHIBA

TV, follow these recommendations and precautions:

29) Always sit approximately 10-25 feet away from the TV and

as directly in front of it as possible. The picture can appear

dull if you sit too far to the left or right of the TV, or if

sunlight or room lights reflect on the screen. Turn the TV

off to check for reflections on the screen, and then remove

the source of reflections while viewing the TV.

30) Always unplug the TV before cleaning. Never use liquid or

aerosol cleaners. Clean only with a soft, dry cloth.

Do not spray volatile compounds, such as insecticide, on

the cabinet. This may discolor or damage the cabinet.

39 WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!

Never spill liquids or push objects of any

kind into the TV cabinet slots.

32) If the air temperature rises suddenly (for example, when

the TV is first delivered), condensation may form on the

lenses. This can make the picture appear distorted or the

color appear faded. If this happens, turn off the TV for 6 to

7 hours to allow the condensation to evaporate.

#01E 0024 04 566272HM195 4

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

Care (continued from previous column)

33)

34)

For added protection of your TV from lightning and power

surges, always unplug the power cord and disconnect the

antenna from the TV if you leave the TV unattended or

unused for long periods of time.

During normal use, the TV may make occasional snapping

or popping sounds. This is normal, especially when the

unit is being turned on or of[ If these sounds become

frequent or continuous, unplug the power cord

and contact a Toshiba Authorized Service Center.

35) Special care for DLW M(digital light processing) units:

•Lamp in this product has a limited service life. The

length of service life varies depending on product use

or user settings. If you use the lamp beyond its service

life:

• you may notice a reduction in the colors and/or

brightness of the picture, at which time you should

replace the lamp unit; and

• the strength of the quartz glass in the lamp will be

reduced and the lamp may rupture. If the lamp

ruptures, the TV will not operate until the lamp unit is

replaced.

See "Lamp unit replacement and care" on pages 103-105.

•Dispose of the used lamp unit by the approved method for

your area.

Thelamp unit contains mercury. Disposal of

mercury may be regulated due to environmental

considerations. For disposal or recycling

information, please contact your local authorities or

the Electronic Industries Alliance (www.eiae.org).

Service

36] WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK!

Never attempt to service the TV yourself,

except as specified on pages 103-105.

Opening and removing the covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Failure to follow this

WARNING may result in death or serious injury. Refer all

servicing not specified in this manual to a Toshiba Authorized

Service Center.

37) If you have the TV serviced:

• Ask the service technician to use only replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer.

• Upon completion of service, ask the service technician to

perform routine safety checks to determine that the TV is

in safe operating condition.

38) When the TV reaches the end of its useful life, ask a

qualified service technician to properly dispose of the TV.

Note: Thelamp unit contains mercury. Disposal of mercury may

be regulated due to environmental considerations. Dispose of

the used lamp unit by the approved method for your area.

For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local

authorities or the Electronic IndustriesAlliance Cwww..eiae.org).

Digital Light Processing, DLPm and the DLP medallion are

trademarks of Texas Instruments.

7/28/05, 4:07 PM F

Important notes about your DLPTM projection TV

The light source for this TV is a projection lamp unit with a

limited service life. When the lamp wears out, the picture may

become dark or black or the lamp may fail, at which time you

must replace the lamp unit. See "Lamp unit replacement and

care" on pages 103-105.

If you set the lamp mode to Low Power,each time you turn on

the TV,the lamp will start out in High Bright mode but will

switch to Low Power mode in approximately 1 minute. You will

notice a change in screen brightness when this happens. This is

normal and is not a malfunction. (See page 75 for details.)

Eachtime you turn on the TV, it may take several minutes to go

from no picture to full picture brightness.

The display of this TV is manufactured using an extremely high

level of precision technology; however, an occasional pixel (dot

of light) may show constantly on the screen.

This is a structural property of DLP TM(Digital Light Processing TM)

technology in the TV and is not a sign of malfunction. Such

pixels are not visible when the picture is viewed from a normal

viewing distance (see item 29 on page 4).

Depending on the media you are viewing, it is possible, although

unlikely, that a limited number of viewers may see a "rainbow

effect" on the screen, which can, in rare instances, result in eye

fatigue. This is a rare occurrence related to technology of this

type, and is not a sign of TV malfunction.

6) Always sit approximately 10-25 feet away from the TV and as

directly in front of it as possible. The picture quality may be

affected by your viewing position and length of viewing time. If

you sit too closely to the TV for too long, you may suffer from

eye fatigue. See item 29 on page 4.

7) This TV contains several cooling fans to moderate the

internal temperature. You may be able to hear the fans

for several minutes after the TV is turned off. This is a

function of the Quick Restart feature and is not a sign of TV

malfunction. You can set the Quick Restart _ feature to stop the

fans as soon as the TV is turned off. See "Setting the Quick

Restart _Mfeature" on page 51.

8) The yellow and blue LED lights at the bottom center of the TV

front indicate your TV's current status. If either light flashes, see

"LED indications" on page 99 for details.

9) If you unplug the power cord, when you plug the power cord in

again the message "Now Booting..." will displayed on the

screen until the picture appears or the yellow LED will blink until

the TV enters standby mode. This is normal and is not a sign of

malfunction.

IO)When connectingan externalAA/device,if you connectthe device's

video outputto the TV andthe device'saudio output to a separate

audio system,the pictureand sound may notsynchronizecompletely.

1l) When playing a video game on this TV,there may be a slight

delay between your command (joystick, keyboard, etc.) and the

picture movement on the screen.

Important Safety Information .............................................2-4

Important notes about your DLPTMprojection TV ...............5

Chapter 1: Introduction ..........................................................7

Welcome to Toshiba ........................................................... 7

Features of your newTV .................................................... 7

Overview of steps for installing, setting up, and

using your new TV ...................................................... 8

Chapter 2: Connecting your TV ............................................ 9

TV front and side panel controls

and connections ............................................................. 9

TV back panel connections ................................................ 10

Overview of cable types ...................................................... 11

About the connection illustrations ...................................... 12

Connecting a digital CableCARD r''.................................... 12

Connecting a VCR and antenna or Cable TV

(no Cable box) ............................................................... 13

Connecting a camcorder ..................................................... 13

Connecting a VCR and Cable box ..................................... 14

Connecting a VCR and satellite receiver ............................. 15

Connecting a DVD player with S-video,a VCR,

and a Cable box.............................................................. 16

Connecting a DVD player with ColorStream_

(component video) and a VCR ....................................... 17

Connecting two VCRs ....................................................... 18

Connecting an HDMI'" or a DVI device to the

HDMI input .................................................................. 19

Connecting a digital audio systein ...................................... 20

Connecting an analog audio systein .................................... 20

Controlling infrared remote-controlled devices

through the TV (IR pass-through) .................................. 21

Connecting IEEE1394 video devices.................................. 22

Using analog-coinpatible IEEE 1394 devices................... 22

Supported signals ........................................................... 22

Using TheaterNet r"on-screen devicecontrol .................. 22

Connecting an AVHD (external hard drive) or D-VHS

digital recorder ........................................................... 23

IEEE1394 device initialization ....................................... 23

IEEE1394 device inanageinent ....................................... 24

G-LINK" connection ........................................................ 25

Chapter 3: Using the remote control ................................. 26

Learning about the remote control ..................................... 26

Installing the remote control batteries ................................. 28

Using the reinote control MODE button to control

your other devices........................................................... 28

Reinote Control fimctional key chart ................................. 29

Prograinming the reinote control to operate

your other devices........................................................... 31

Multi-brand reinote control device codes ............................ 33

Chapter 4: Menu layout and navigation ...........................35

Main menu layout .............................................................. 35

Setup/Installation inenu layout ........................................... 36

Navigating the inenu systein ............................................... 36

Chapter 5: TV Guide On Screen TMsetup .............................37

Setting up the TV Guide On ScreenT"system ..................... 37

TV Guide On ScreenT''Reminder ...................................... 40

Turning off"the TV Guide On Screen_"automatic display

feature ............................................................................ 40

f( bnfinued on next?age)

#01E 005-006 566272HM195 5

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/B5, 4:07 PM

[

Chapter 6: Setting up your TV .............................................41

Selecting the menu language ............................................... 41

Configuring tile antenna input sources............................... 41

Prograinming channels into the TV's channel memo U....... 42

Programining channels automatically .......................... 42

Manually adding and deleting chaimels in the

channel memory ..................................................... 43

Progrannning ?Tourfavoritechannels .................................. 44

Setting up and using TheaterNet _"on-screen

device control ................................................................. 45

Setting up TheaterNet ................................................. 45

Using the TheaterNet control icons............................. 46

TheaterNet IR device codes .................................. 47-49

Setting the AVHD deviceskip time .................................... 50

Setting the HDMI _"audio inode ........................................ 50

Setting the time and date .................................................... 50

Viewing the CableCARD _''inenu ...................................... 51

Setting the Quick Restart_"feature ..................................... 51

Viewing the digital signal ineter ......................................... 52

Viewing the system status ................................................... 52

Chapter 7: Using the IV Guide On Screen TM

interactive program guide ...............................................53

Setting up the TV Guide On ScreenT"systein ..................... 53

Navigating the TV Guide On Screet{" system .................... 54

TV Guide On Screen*"reinote control functions ........ 54

Video Window ........................................................... 55

Panel Menus ............................................................... 55

Infb Box...................................................................... 56

TV Guide On Screen*"Icons ...................................... 56

TV Guide On Screen_"Services.......................................... 57

LISTINGS screen ....................................................... 57

SEARCH screen .......................................................... 58

RECORDINGS screen ............................................... 60

SCHEDULE screen .................................................... 61

Record features ........................................................... 61

Remind features .......................................................... 63

SETUP screen............................................................. 65

Change system settings .......................................... 65

Change channel display ......................................... 65

Change detCaultoptions .......................................... 66

Chapter 8: Using the lV's features .....................................67

Selecting the video input source to view ............................. 67

Labeling the video input sources......................................... 68

Tuning channels ................................................................. 69

Using the Channel Browser:'*...................................... 69

Tuning your f:avoritechannels ..................................... 71

Tuning to the next prograinmed channel .................... 71

Tuning to a specific channel (progrannned or

unprogramined) ...................................................... 71

Switching between two channels using

Channel Return ...................................................... 71

Switching between vwo channels using

SurfLock'". .............................................................. 71

Selecting the picture size..................................................... 72

Natural picture size ..................................................... 72

TheaterWide 1picture size.......................................... 73

TheaterWide 2 picture size.......................................... 73

TheaterWide 3 picture size.......................................... 73

Full picture size ........................................................... 73

Scrolling the Theater\Vide _ picture .................................... 74

Using the auto aspect ratio feature ...................................... 74

Selecting the cinema mode (480i signals only) .................... 75

Selecting the lainp mode .................................................... 75

Using the POP features ...................................................... 76

Using the POP double-window feature ....................... 76

Switching the speaker audio (main or POP) ................ 77

POP double-window aspect ratio ................................ 77

Using the FREEZE feature ................................................. 78

Using the f:avoritechannel scan feature ............................... 78

Adjusting the picture .......................................................... 79

Selecting the picture inode .......................................... 79

Adjusting the picture quality ....................................... 79

Using CableClear_ DNR (digital noise reduction) ...... 80

Selecting tile color teinperature ................................... 80

Using MPEG noise reduction ..................................... 81

Using dynamic contrast ............................................... 81

Using the closed caption inode ........................................... 82

Advanced closed captions ............................................ 82

Digital closed captions ................................................ 83

Adjusting the audio ............................................................ 84

Muting the sound ....................................................... 84

Using the digital audio selector ................................... 84

Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts ................................... 84

Adjusting the audio quality ......................................... 85

Using the sub-bass systein (SBS) ................................. 85

Using the StableSound_ feature ................................... 85

Using the SRSW£)W _"surround sound feature .......... 86

Turning off"the built-in speakers ................................. 86

Selecting the optical audio output t%rmat ................... 86

Using the media player ....................................................... 87

Media specifications .................................................... 87

Using the JPEG picture viewer .................................... 88

Using the MP3 audio player ....................................... 90

Memory card care and handling .................................. 90

Setting the On/OtTTimer .................................................. 91

Setting the sleep timer ........................................................ 91

Displaying TV setting information on-screen using

RECALL ........................................................................ 92

Understanding the auto power off feature ........................... 92

Understanding the last mode memory feature .................... 92

Using the gray level feature ................................................. 92

Chapter 9: Using the Locks menu ......................................93

Entering the PIN code ....................................................... 93

If you cannot remember your PIN code ............................. 93

Changing your PIN code ................................................... 93

BlockingTV programsand moviesby rating (V-Chip) ......... 94

Blocking channels ............................................................... 95

Unlocking prograins teinporarily ........................................ 95

Locking video inputs .......................................................... 95

Using the GameTimer _"..................................................... 96

Using the control panel lock feature ................................... 96

Chapter 10: Troubleshooting ................................................97

General troubleshooting ..................................................... 97

LED indications ................................................................. 99

TV Guide On ScreenT"FAQs................................... 100 102

Chapter 11: Appendix ......................................................... 103

LaInp unit replaceinent ............................................ 103-105

Specifications ................................................................... 106

Limited United States Warranty ....................................... 107

Limited Canada \Varranty ................................................ 108

Index .............................................................................. 110, 111

(

#01E 005-0 6 566272HM195 6

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/B5, 4:07 PM F

Welcometo Toshiba

Thank you for purchasing this Toshiba TV, one of the most innow:tive DLP TMprojection [ See "Important notes about your [

TVs on the market.The goalof this manual is to guideyou through setting up and [ DLP:'_projection TV" on page 5. I

operating your TV as quickly as possible.

• This manual applies to models 56HM195, 62HM195, :and72HM195. Before you start reading check the model number on

the back of your TV.

• Instructions in this manual are based on using the remote control, xfi_t:also can use the controls on the TV control panel if they

have the same name :asthose referred to on the remote control. (MENU on the control panel functions :asENTER when a menu

is on-screen or when the TV Guide On ScreenTMsystem is open.)

• The side panel and back panel provide terminals for connecting other equipment to your TV. Seepage 9 for TV control panel :and

side panel details. See page 10 for back panel details. Seepages 12-25 for instructions on connecting other devices to your TV.

• Please read all safety and operating instructions in this manual carefully, and keep this manual for future reference.

FeaturesofyournewTV

The fbllowing are just a few of the many exciting features of your new Toshiba widescreen, integrated HD, DLP_"projection TV:

•Integrated digital tuning (8VSB ATSCand QAM} eliminates the need for a separate digital converter set-top box (in most cases).

•TV Guide On Screen := no-fee interactive program guide (Chapters 5 and 7).

•Digital CableCARD:=slot for viewing encrypted digital Cable TV programs (page 12).

•Digital recording by connecting a D-VHS digital recording device or a Toshiba Symbio TMAudio/Video Hard Drive Recorder to

one of the IEEE1394 jacks.You can record high definition and standard definition material from either tuner (page23).

•Memory card slots [SD Memory Card, MultiMediaCard, Memory Stick, CompactFlash, xD-Picture Card _''] for viewing JPEG

files as a "slide show" (page 89) and for playing MP3 files (page 90).

•TheaterNet := icons for on-screen control of'external IRand IEEE1394 devices (page 45).

•Two IEEE1394 portsfor multi-device connection and control (page 22).

•Two HDMI {[DVI}digital, high-definition multimedia interfaces (page 19).

•Two sets of ColorStmam *HD high-resolution component video inputs (pages 15 and 17).

•Dolby Digital* (page 20) and SRS WOW:= (page 86) audio technologies.

•Digital Audio Out optical audio connection (page 20).

•CableClear _DNR digital picture noise reduction (page 80).

• Double-window POP (page 76) and multi-window Favorites (page 78) features.

Note: After you set up the

TV Guide On Screen :_ system

{:Chapter 5}, the program guide

opens automatically by default

when you turn on the TV. You can

turn off the automatic program

guide {:page 40) and instead

press the TV GUIDE button on

the remote control to manually

open the program guide.

Inthe UnitedStates,TV Guideandothermhtedmarksareregisteredmarksof Gemstar-TVGuideInternationalInc.and/orone of its affiliates.In Canada,TVGUIDEis aregisteredmarkof

TranscontinentalInc.,and is usedunderlicensebyGemstarTVGuideInternationalInc.TheTVGuideOnScreen:Msystemis manufacturedunderlicensefloraGemstarTVGuide

International,inc. and/oroneof its affiliates.TheTVGuideOnScreen:Msystemis protectedbyoneor moreofthe followingissuedUnitedStatespatents6,498,895,6,418,556,6,331,877;

6,239,794;6,154,203;5,940,073;4,908,713;4,751,578;4,706,121.

GEMSTAR-TVGUIDE INTERNATIONALINC. AND/OR ITS RELATEDAFFILIATESARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLEFOR THEACCURACY OR

AVAILABILITY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION OR OTHER DATAIN THE TV GUIDE ON SCREEN:_ SYSTEM AND CANNOT

GUARANTEESERVICE AVAILABILITY IN YOUR AREA. IN NO EVENTSHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED

AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE ACCURACY OR AVAILABILITY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE

INFORMATION OR OTHER DATAIN THE TV GUIDE ON SCREEN:= SYSTEM.

•Thisproductincorporatescopyrightprotectiontechnologythat isprotectedbyU.S.patentsand otherintellectualproperlyrights.Useof thiscopyrightprotectiontechnologymustbe

authorizedby Macrovisionand isintendedfor homeandotherlimitedpay per view usesonly,unlessotherwiseauthorizedby Macrovision.Reverseengineeringordisassemblyis

prohibited.

#01E 007-008 566272HM195 7

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:08 PM

Overviewofstepsfor installing,settingup,andusingyournewTV

Follow these steps to set tip your TV and begin using its many exciting features.

1Carefully read the important safety, installation, care,

and service information on pages 2-5. Keep this

manual for future reference.

2 Observe the following when choosing a location for

the TV:

• Placethe TV on the floor or on the optional TV stand listed in

the "Specifications" section (page 106}.

NOTICEOFPOSSIBLE!"1/STANDINSTABILITY

DANGER:RISKOFSERIOUSPERSONALINJURY

ORDEATH!UsethisTVonlywiththeTOSHIBATV

standlistedinthe "Specifications"section(page106).Usewithother

standsmayresultininstability,causingpossibleinjuryor death.

• Placethe TV ina location where light does not reflect on the

screen.

• Placethe TV far enough from walls and other objects to allow

proper ventilation. Inadequate ventilation may cause

overheating,which will damage the TV.THIS TYPE OF

DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED UNDER THE TOSHIBA

WARRANTY.

• Read"Installation" on pages 3-4.

• Read"Important notes about your DLP_MTV" on page 5.

Do not plug in any power cords until AFTERyou have

connected all canes and devicesto your TV.

BEFORE connecting cables or devices to the TV, learn

the functions of the TV's connections and controls (pages 9

and 10).

5Connect your other electronic device(s) to the TV

(pages 12-25).

6. Connect the G-LINK" cable (either one of the enclosed IR

blastel cables}fi-om youl VCRand/or Cable box (if applicable} to

the G-LINK_Mterminal so you can use the TV Guide OnScreen_M

features (appliesto VCRs and cable boxes only}. See page 25.

7. Install the batteries in the remote control (page 28}.

8See "Learning about the remote control" (page 26) for

an overview of the buttons on the remote control.

9Program the remote control to operate your other

device(s) (pages 28-34}.

10. AFTER connecting all cables and devices, plug in the

power cords for your TVand other devices.

11. After you plug in the TV power cord, the yellow LED (on

the TVfront) will blink whib the TV is booting until the remote

control is usable.When the yellow LED stops blinking, press

POWERto turn on the TV.

See 'tED indications" onpage 99.

12 See "Menu layout and navigation" for a quick overview

of navigating the TV's menu system (pages 35-36}

13 See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide

On Screen T"system (if available in your area).

14 See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide

On Screen T" program guide (if available in your area).

15. Program channels into the TV's channel memory

(page 42).

16. Set up the TheaterNet _" on-screen device control

feature (if applicableto youl particular home theater system

components) (page 45).

17. For details on using the memory card JPEG picture

viewer and MP3 audio player, see page 87.

18 For details on using the TV's features, see Chapter 8.

19 For help, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide (Chapter

lO).

20. For technical specifications and warranty information,

see Chapter 11.

21 Enjoy your new TV!

(

#01E O07-0 8 566272HM195 8

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/B5, 4:08 PM r

TVfront andsidepanelcontrolsandconnections

Front of TV

l.i--

Right side of TV Side panel

Rein( te sensor

__._-- Blue/Yellow LEDs

* The MENU button on the TV control panel functions as the ENTER

button when a menu is on-screen.

(!) Remotesensor (behind the screen) -- Point the remote

control toward this area of the TV screen. See "Remote

control effective range" on page 27.

(_) TV/VlDEO -- Repeatedly press to change the source }_u are

viewing (ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDEO 1,VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,

HDMI 1, HDMI 2, ColorStream HD1, ColorStream

HD2).

(_) EXIT-- Press to close an on-screen menu instantly.

(_) ARROWS AV_ I_ -- When a menu is on-screen, these

buttons function as up/down/lefdright menu navigation

buttons.

(_) MENU (ENTER)-- Press to access the menu s}_tem (see

page 35). When a menu is on-screen or the TV Guide

On Screen_'_program guide is open, the MENU button on

the control panel functions as the ENTER button.

(_) POWER-- Press to turn the TV on and of_:

If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote

control or TV control panel and you cannot turn off the TV,

press and hold the POWER button on the TV front panel

for 5 or more seconds to reset the TV.

®CRANNEL^v-- When no menu is on-screen, these

buttons change the channel (programmed channels only; see

page 42). When a menu is on-screen, these buttons ftmction

as up/down menu navigation buttons.

EXIT (_)

GUIDE (_)

®VOLUME -+--When no menu is on-screen, these

buttons adjust the volume level. When a menu is on-screen,

these buttons function as left/right menu navigation

buttons.

(_) GUIDE- Press to accessthe TV Guide On Screen _'*

program guide. (See page 53 for details on using the

program guide.)

(_) Blue andYellow LEDs

When the blue LED lights solid (not blinking), it indicates

that the TV power cord is plugged in.

When the yellow LED lights solid (not blinking), it

indicates that recording is in progress.

See "LED indications" on page 99 for additional

infi_rmation.

(_) VIDEO-3 -- The side panel A/V connections are referred to

as "VIDEO 3" and include standard A/V connections plus

optional Swideo. (The VIDE() 1 and VIDEO 2 A/V

connections are on the TV's back panel; see page 10.

@Memory card slots -- Insert a memory card into one of

the memory card slots to view JPEG files (such as photos) as

a "slide show" on }_mrTV or listen to MP3 audio files (see

page 87).

#01E 009-011 566272HM195 9

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:10 PM

TVbackpanelconnections

For an explanation of cable _:pes, see page 11. ® ® @® @ ®

1/!, II

(!) ANT-1 (CABLE) IN and ANT-2 IN --Two inputs that

support analog (NTSC) and digital (ATSC) offair antenna

signals and analog and digital (QAM) Cable TV signals.

Note: If youhavean antennaonly connectit to ANT L if you have

both cable TVandanantenna,connectthe cableTVto ANT 1and

theantennato ANT2

(_) VIDEO 1 IN and VIDEO 2 IN -- Two sets of standard

(composite) video and standard audio inputs plus optkmal

S-video inputs for connecting devices with composite video

or S-video output.

Note: Standard (composite) video and S video cables cany

only video infom_at/on; separate audio cables a_ required for a

complete connection,

(_) ColorStream®HD-I and ColorStream@HD-2 -- Two sets

of ColorStream c_high-definition component video and

standard stereo audio inputs for connecting devices with

component video output, such as a Toshiba DVD player

with ColorStream ®.See pages 15 and 17.

Note: Component video cables catty only video #Tformation;

separate audio cables are f_qu#_d for a complete connection.

(_) A/V OUT -- Standard composite video and analog audio

outputs for connecting a VCR for editing and dubbing. See

page 18 for details.

(_) Variable Audio OUT -- Standard analog audio outputs for

connecting an analog amplifier with external speakers. See

page 20.

(_) Digital Audio OUT -- Optical audio output in Dolby

Digital or PCM (pulse-code modulation) format fi_r

connecting an external Dolby Digital decoder, amplifier,

A/V receiver, or home theater s}_tem with optical audio

input. See page 20.

0 G-LINW" -- For use with one of the enclosed IR blaster/

G-LINK'"*cables to enable the TV Guide On Screen_'_

recording features. See page 25.

® @ ® @ @ @

(_) TheaterNet _"(IR) OUT -- For controlling infrared

remote-controlled devices through the TV. X_)ucan connect

tip to two devices with either one of the enclosed IR blaster

cables, and then control the devices using the TV's IR pass-

through or TheaterNet _"(on-screen device control) features.

See pages 21 and/i5.

(_) HDMI Audio IN -- For use when connecting a DVI

device with analog audio output to one of the HDMI

inputs. See page 19. Also see item 10 below.

(_ (2) HDMF" IN 1 and 2 -- Two High-Definition

Multimedia Interface inputs receive digital audio and

uncompressed digital video from an HDMI device or

uncompressed digital video from a DVI device. See page 19.

Note:NEVERCONNECTTHIS IV TOA PERSONAL

COMPUTER (PC). Tb/sTV£ notintendedforusew#h8PC

(_) (2) IEEEI394 --Two bi-directional digital IEEE1394

ports fbr connecting multiple devices with compressed

digital video. Because these ports are bi-directional, they can

be used for playback and recording. You can control )_)ur

IEEE1394 devices using the TV's TheaterNet on-screen

device control icons. See pages 21-24 and 46.

Note:

•IEEE1394cablecaniesbothaudioandvideo/nfomTation,

separate audiocablesarenotrequ#_d.

•NEVERCONNECTTHIS 711TOA PERSONAL

COMPUTER CPC). gh£TVisnot#TtendedforusewitbaPC

(_) CabIeCARD _' slot -- For use with a digital securit7 card

and digital cable TV service (provided by }_mr local cable

operator) to view encrypted digital programming. See pages

12 and 51.

HDM I, the HDMI logo and High-DefinitionMultimedia Interfacearetrademarks or

registeredtrademarksof HDMI Licensing LLC.

CableCARD isa trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc.

#01E 009-0 1 566272HM195 10

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:10 PM r

Overviewofcabletypes

NOTE: NEVER CONNECT THIS TV I

TO A PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC).

THISTVISNOTINTENDEDFORUSEWITHA PC.

Note: TwoduaPwand/Rblastef/G L1NtCMcablesare included wit/?you/ 7qZAll otherrequired

cables,if not providedwit/?your otherdevices,canbe purchasedat manyelectronicsaccesso/y

suppliers.

•Coaxial (F-type) cable is used for connecting )_mr antenna, cable TV service, and/or

cable converter box to the ANT-1 and/or ANT-2 RF inputs on your TV.

•Standard A/V cables (composite video) usually come in sets of three, and are fi)r use

with video devices with standard audio and standard (composite) video output. These

cables (and the related inputs on ?amr TV) are typically color-coded according to use:

yellow for video, red for stereo right audio, and white for stereo left (or mono) audio.

• S-video cable is for use with video devices with S-video output. Separate audio cables

are required for a complete connection.

Note: An S videocableprovidesbette/pictu/e perfom?ancethan acompositevideocable if

you connectanS videocable,be sureto disconnectthe standa/d(composite3videocableor

thepicturepeffom?ancewillbe unacceptable.

•Component video cables come in sets of three and are for use with video devices with

component video output. (ColorS/ream ® is Toshiba's brand of component video.)

These cables are typically color-coded red, green, and blue. Separate audio cables are

required for a complete connection.

Note: Componentvideocablesprovidebetterpictureperformancethana standard(composite)

videoorS videocable.

•HDMI cable is for use with devices with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia

Interface) output. HDMI cable delivers digital audio and video in its native format.

This cable carries both video and audio information; therefore, separate audio cables are

not required for a complete HDMI device connection. See page 19 for further details.

Note: HDM/cableprovides better picture peffom?ance thanastandard(composite) videoor

S videocable,

• IEEE1394 cable is for use with video devices with compressed digital video output

that meet CEA specifications for IEEE1394. This cable carries both video and audio

inf)_rmation; therefore, no separate audio cables are required fi)r a complete connection.

See pages 22-24.

Note:

•Thetransmissioncapabilityof anyIEEE1394cable,used witbthL_TVmustbe $400

(400 Mbps maximum),

• IEEE7394cab/eprovidesbetterpicturepeffomT?ancetbanastandatd(composite)

videoorS videocable.

•Dual-wand IR blaster/G-LINK'" cable is f)_ruse with video devices with IR (infrared)

remote control. Two of these cables are included with )_mr TV. One is for connection

to the G-LINK'"* terminal (page 25) to enable TV Guide On Screen"* recording

features (Chapters 5 and 7). The other can be used with the TV's IR pass-through

feature (page 21) and TheaterNet"' on-screen device control feature (page 45).

Note: Thetwo IRb/astet/G LINKTMcablesincludedwit/?gout TV/?avespecificcbaractedsticsif?at

allowthornto WOlf<properlywith this TV_/ROUTand G LINKTMpelts. Never use other

aftermarket IR blaster or G-LIN/_ _cables with this TV Othercablesmaynot €unction

properlyandcancausedamage.TH/,_TYPEOFDAMAGE/,_ NOTCOVEREDBY YOUR

TOSHIBAWARRANTY

•Optical audio cable is for connecting receivers with Dolby Digital or PCM

(pulse-code modulation) optical audio input to the TV's DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

terminal. See page 20.

Coaxial(F-type)cable

StandardANcables(red/white/yellow)

@1:1_

S-videocable

Componentvideocables(red!green/blue

HDNIcable

[]

IEEE1394 cable(4-pin)

Dual-wandIRblaster/G-LINK"rMcable

(2 included)

Opticalaudiocable

Note: Although your TV includes both HDM/

and/FEE1394 connections, it may not

operate with another device you have that

includes such a connection. For example, the

/EEE1394 ports are not intended to operate

with current model Mini DV camcorders, and

the HDM! input is not intended for

connection to a computer: Copyright

protection requirements may also prohibit or

/ifflit connectivit3_ See page 19 for details

about the HDM! input. See pages 22-24 for

details about the tEEE1394 ports.

#01E 009-011 566272HM195 11

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:11 PM

[

Abouttheconnectionillustrations

You can connec[ different types and brands of devices to your TV in several different configurations. The connection illustrations in

this manual are representative of typical device connections only. The input/output terminals on your devices may differ from those

illustrated herein. For details on connecting and using your specific devices, refer to each device's owner's manual.

Connectinga digitalCableCARDTM

This digital television is capable of receiving analog basic, digital

basic, and digital premium cable television programming by 1.

direct connection to a cable system providing such

programming. 2.

A security card (such as a digital CableCARDTM), provided by

x_ur cable operator, is required to view encrypted digital

programming. 3.

Certain advanced and interactive digital cable services (such as

video-on-demand, a cable operator's enhanced program guide,

and data-enhanced television services) will not work with the

use of a CableCARD _'*and may require the use of a separate set-

top box from your cable operator.

For more information, call your local cable operator.

You will need..

_' one digital CableCARD _'' (contact your cable operator)

_' digital cable subscription service (contact your cable

operator)

TV back panel

IN _,Y _Y VAR OU

STreAMH_I

ARg{7_l)

FromdigitalCableservice

(connecttoANT1only)

, v_o AUmO ourl

G'LINK Thea_erNet

p- O

Thiscable should be connected to ANT 1 terminal directly.If you connect

the cable via a VCR, the TVmay not receivethe signals correctly.

CableCARD is a trademark of Cable Television Laboratories, Inc.

To view encrypted digital channels:

Connect your digital Cable TV cable to ANT-1.

With the front of the CableCARD _'_facing tip, insert it into

the CableCARD _'*slot on the back of the TV (see

illustration below left).

After the CableCARD _''is inserted, a CableCARD _''option

appears in the Applications menu, with informational

screens provided by )_mrdigital CableCARD '_'_service. See

page 51 for additional information.

Note:

•Always use the EJECTbutton to remove the Cab/eCARD _M,Never

r_rnove the CableCAR D_''by hand

• Never Inse/t ar_yobject or card (incltlding, without hfrlitat/on, a

PCMCIA card) other than a CableCARD _ into the CableCARD _

sloL

• Always make sure the CableCARD _Mis facing the correct direction,

• Connect the cable foryour digital cable TVse/vice to ANT 1on!_

• WhenusingaCab/eCARD TM,channdprogrammingfaunnecessa/y

because the Cab/eCARD _Hautomatica/!y loads the cable channel

//,stinto the TV_ channd memo(y (page 42),

• The CableCARD _Mmay take up to 5 minutes to '>air" with the TV

and download channd /nbmTation. Cab/eCARD _MInfo/rnation and

channels will not be available until thfa process fa completed

CableCARD_Mtechnolog%like all new and emerging technology,may from

t/me to t/meexperiencecompatibili_/issuesdue to the differentways in

which televisionmanufacturersand cable systemoperatorsimplement the

CableCARD_'_specificationsMost issuescan be easilyresolved In the

event thatyou experienceanyperformance-relatedCableCARD_issues

with your Toshibatelevision,please contact the following,

•In the U.$., call TACPConsumerSolutionsat _800] 681-38_ _or visit

httpt//www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp.

•In Canada, call TCLCustomerService at b800-268-3404,

#01E 012-0 5 566272HM195 12

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:11 PM [

ConnectingaVCRandantennaorCableTV(noCablebox)

You will need..

I, one signal splitter

I, three coaxial cables

I, two sets of standard A/V cables

•Forbetterpictureperformance,ifyour VCRhasSvideo, use an

S videocableUus theaudio cables)insteadof thestandard

videocable.Howeve/;do not connectboth typesof videocablea

to VIDEO7(or VIDEO2) at thesame timeor thepicture

peffomTancewillbe unacceptabh,

• ffyou havea mono VCR,connectL/MONO on the TVtoyour

VCRt_audio out tem}inalusingthe whiteaudio cableonly

[_ To view the antenna or Cable signal:

Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV.*

To view the VCP_

Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source

on the TV.*

To use the TV Guide On Screen 1"recording features:

1. Connect the G-LINK " cable according to the

instructions on page 25.

2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT

terminals on the TV (see illustration).

3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to )_)ur

VCR owner's manual for details), and then turn OFF the

VCR.

4. See Chapter 5 fbr details on setting up the TV Guide

On Screen_''system.

5. See Chapter 7 fbr details on using the TV Guide

On Screen_"system.

FromCableTV or antenna

t I+'q'I °Sq

Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT te/m/bals output s/_Tna/sfrom the

ANT 1, ANT2, VIDEO 1, VIDE02, and VIDEO 3 term/bals when the

appropnate /bput mode is selectecl

The unauthorized recording,use, distribution,or revision of television

programs,videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibitedunder the

CopyrightLaws of the United States and other countries,and maysubject

youto civil and criminal liability.

Connectinga camcorder

You will need..

I, one set of standard A/V cables

•Forbetterpicturepefformance, ifyourcamcorderhasS video,usean

S videocable(p/ustheaudio cables:)insteadof thestandardvideocable.

Do not connectbotb anS videocableanda standardvideocableto VIDEO

3 at thesametime or thepictureperformancewillbe unacceptable

To view the camcorder video:

Select the VIDEO .3video input source on the TV.*

* Toselectthe video input source,press INPUTon the remotecontrol(see page 67).

Toprogramthe TV remotecontrolto operateotherdevices,see Chapter3.

Camcorder

VIDEO3 inputsonTVrightsidepanel

#01E 012-025 566272HM195 13

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:12 PM

ConnectingaVCRandCablebox

You will need..

I, one signal splitter

I, five coaxial cables

I, two sets of standard A/V cables

•ForbetterpicturepefformancefromyourVCR.lfyourVCRhas

S video, connect an S video cable Ut/s the audio cab/e53 instead

of the standa/d video cable. Do not connect an S video cable and

a standa/d video cable to VIDEO 1(or VIDEO 2) at the same tffne

or the picture performance will be unacceptable.

• ffyou have a mono VCR, connect L/MONO on the TV to your

VCR_ audio out tefTnlna/using the white audio cable only

• When you use aCable box, you may not be able to use the remote

control to program or access ce/tain features on the TV

0To view basic Cable channels and use the TV's features:

Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV.* Use the

TV controls (control panel or remote control) to change

channels and access the TV's features.

To view basic and premium Cable channels:

Turn OFF the VCR. Select the ANT 2 video input source

on the TV.* Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4 (whichever

channel the Cable box output is set to). Use the Cable box

controls to change channels.

To view the VCR:

Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source

on the TV.*

Note: AVIDEO1connectionwithanS Videocable (instead

of a standa/dvideocable) willprovidebetterpicture

pefl-ofTnance(asmentionedif} thefif:_tbulleteditem at the

top of thispage),

* Toselectthe video input source,press INPUTon the remotecontrol

(see page 67).Toprogramthe TV remotecontrolto operateother

devices,seeChapter3.

The unauthorized recording,use, distribution,or revision of television

programs,videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibitedunder the

CopyrightLaws of the United States and other countries,and maysubject

youto civil and criminal liability.

From Cable TV

Cab!ebox "_Signa! Splitter IN ]

OH3 IN OUT

oo, J--t 0o,

Stereo VCR I

_ OUTIoTV

C,._IUK Th_temet

Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT tefm/bals output s/iTnalsfrom the

ANT 1, ANT2, VIDEO 1, VIDE02, and VIDEO 3 termkTals when the

appropnate /bput mode is selectecJ

[2 To enable the TV Guide On Screen _"system to work

with your cable box and to use the TV Guide

On Screen '_"recording features:

1. Connect the G-LINK '_'_cable according to the

instructions on page 25.

2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT

terminals on the TV (see illustration).

3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to )_mr

VCR owner's manual for details), and then turn OFF the

VCR.

4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide

On Screen_"s)_tem.

5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide

On Screen_"system.

#01E 012-0 5 566272HM195 14

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:12 PM [

ConnectingaVCRandsatellitereceiver

You will need..

_' one signal splitter

_' four coaxial cables

_' one set of component video cables (if your

satellite receiver does not have component

video, connect the standard A/V cables only)

_' one pair of standard audio cables

_' two sets of standard A/V cables

•Forbetterpietufepefformance, ifyoursatel/ite

t_ceiverand VCRhaveS video,connectS video

cablesUus theaudio cab/e_2insteadof thestandard

videoeab/es.Do notconnectboth b/pesof video

cableto VIDEO1 (or VIDEO2) at thesame timeor

thepicturepeffom}ancewillbe unacceptable.

• ffyou haveamono VCR,connectL/MONO on the

TV(VIDEO U toyour VCR_AUDIO OUTterminal

usingthewh/_ audioeableonly

From antenna

SignalsP!itte, IN}

o. o.

To view satellite programs using the component video

connections:

Select the ColorStream HD-1 video input source on the

TV.*

To view satellite programs using the standard

video connections or to record satellite programs:

Turn on all three devices. Set the VCR to the appropriate

line input (refer to your VCR owner's manual for details).

Select the VIDEO 2 video input source on the TV.*

Satellitereceiver

To view the VCR or view and record antenna channels:

Turn ON the VCR. Tune the VCR to the channel you want

to watch. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source on the

TV.*

Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT te/m/bals output signals from the ANT 1,

ANT2, VIDEO/, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 term/hals when the appropriate

/hput mode/is selected.

* Toselectthe video input source,press INPUTon the remotecontrol

(see page 67).Toprogramthe TV remotecontrolto operateother

devices,seeChapter3.

The unauthorizedrecording,use,distribution,or revision of television

programs,videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibitedunder the

CopyrightLaws of the United States and other countries,and maysubject

youto civil and criminal liability.

To use the TV Guide On Screen _" recording features:

1. Connect the G-LINK '_'_cable according to the

instructions on page 25.

2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT

terminals on the "IV (see illustration).

3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to your

VCR owner's manual for details), and then turn OFF the

VCR.

4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the 'IV Guide

On Screen"* s)_tem.

5. See Chapter 7 fbr details on using the "IV Guide

On Screen"* system.

Note: TheTVGuideOn Screen_M,systemdoesnot/eee_veprogram

listingsfrom orfor anysatell/?esetvice,

#01E 012-025 566272HM195 15

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:13 PM

[

Connectinga DVDplayerwithS-video,aVCR,anda Cablebox

You will need..

I, one signal splitter

I, five coaxial cables

I, two sets of standard A/V cables

Note: If youhavea mono VCRconnectL/MONO onthe TV

(VIDEO 7)to you/VCR's audio out terminalusingthe white

audiocable,only

I, one Swideo cable

I, one pair of standard audio cables

Note:

•Ifyour DVD playerdoesnothaveS video,usea standard

videocableinstead Do not connectanS videocableand a

standardvideocableto VIDEO 1(o/ VIDEO2) at thesame

time or thepictureperformancewillbe unacceptable.

• ffyour DVDplayerhascomponentvideo,seepage 17

• Do not connectthe DVDpktyerand VCRto thesameset of

A/V inputson the TK (Seetheillustration,whichshowsthe

VCRconnectedto VIDEO Ionthe Tg,and theDVDp/aye/

connectedto VIDEO2J

To view basic channels and access the TV s features:

Select the ANT 1 video input source.* Use the TV

controls to change channels and access the TV's features.

To view premium Cable channels:

Turn OFF the VCR. Select the ANT 2 video input

source on the TV.* Tune the TV to channel 3 or 4

(whichever channel the Cable box output is set to). Use

the Cable box controls to change channels.

Note: Whenyou usea Cablebox,you maynotbe able,to

use theremote controlto program or accesscertain

featureson the T_

To view the DVD player:

Turn ON the DVD player. Select the VIDEO 2 video

input source on the TV.*

To view the VCRa

Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input

source on the TV.*

* Toselectthe video input source,press INPUTon the remotecontrol

(see page 67).Toprogramthe TV remotecontrolto operateother

devices,seeChapter3.

The unauthorizedrecording,use, distribution, or revisionof

televisionprograms,videotapes,DVDs, and other materials is

prohibitedunder the CopyrightLaws of the United Statesand other

countries,and maysubject youto civil and criminal liability.

Fromantennaor CableTV

DVDplayer with S-video

Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT term/bals output s/2na/s from tbe ANT 1,

ANT2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 tem_/nals when the appropnate /bput

mode/s selected.

To enable the TV Guide On Screen_"system to work with

your cable box and to use the TV Guide On Screen_"

recording features:

1. Connect the G-LINK'"* cable according to the instructions on

page 25.

2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT terminals

on the TV (see illustration).

3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to )_mr VCR

owner's manual for details), and then turn OFF the VCR.

4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting tip the TV Guide

On Screen_'*system.

5. See Chapter 7 for details on using the TV Guide On Screen_'_

system.

#01E 012-0 5 566272HM195 16

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:13 PM [

Connectinga DVDplayerwithColorStream[componentvideo[}anda VCR

YourTV has ColorStream c_(component video) inputs.

You will need..

I, one signal splitter

I, three coaxial cables

I, two sets of standard A/V cables

•Forbetterpieturepertormance,ifyour VCRhasS video,usean

S videocable,(plus theaudio eables)insteadof thestandard

videoeab/e.Howeve/;do not connectboth typesof videoeableto

VIDEO1(or VIDEO2) at the samet/meor thepicture

peffom}ancewillbe unacceptable,

• ffyou haveamono VCR,connectL/MONO on the TV

(VIDEO 7j to your VCRtsaudio out tem}inalusing the white

audiocableonly

I' one pair of standard audio cables

I, one set of component video cables

• Youcanconnectthecomponentvideocables(plusaudio

cab/e_2fiefr} theDVD playerto eitherset of Co/orStfeam

te/mina/son the TV(HD I o/ HD 2}, TheCo/orStf_amHD 1

andHD 2 te/minalscanbe usedwit/} Pmgresmve(480p,

720pj and Interlaced(480/: 10800scan,!wtems,A70801

mgnalwillprovidethebestpicturepeffom}ance.

• ffyourDVDplayerdoesnothavecomponentvfdeo, seepage

16.ff your DVDplayerhasHDMI video,seepage 19,

[_ To view antenna or Cable channels:

Select the ANT 1 video input source on the TV.*

[_ To view the DVD player:

Turn ON the DVD player. Select the ColorStream HDq

video input source on the TV.*

[_ To view the VCI_

Turn ON the VCR. Select the VIDEO 1 video input

source on the TV.*

To record a TV program while watching a DVD:

Turn ON the VCR. Tune the VCR to the channel to

record. Select the ColorStream HDq video input source

on the TV *to view the DVD.

* Toselectthe video input source,press INPUTon the remotecontrol

(see page 67).Toprogramthe TV remotecontrolto operateother

devices,seeChapter3.

The unauthorizedrecording,use,distribution,or revision of television

programs,videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibitedunder the

CopyrightLaws of the United States and other countries,and maysubject

youto civil and criminal liability.

From antenna or Cable

Signal splitter !N

Stereo VCR

DVDplayer with component video

Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT term/hals output signals from the ANT 1,

ANT2, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 term/hals when the approptTDte

/hput mode/s selected.

[_ To use the TV Guide On Screen_"recording features:

1. Connect the G-LINK _' cable according to the

instructions on page 25.

2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT

terminals on the TV (see illustration).

3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to )_mr

VCR owner's manual for details), and then turn OFF the

VCR.

4. See Chapter 5 for details on setting up the TV Guide

On Screen"*s)_tem.

5. See Chapter 7 fi)r details on using the TV Guide

On Screen_'*system.

#01E 012-025 566272HM195 17

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:14 PM

[

ConnectingtwoVCRs

You will need..

_' one signal splitter

_' three coaxial cables

_' two sets of standard A/V cables

•Forbetterpictureperformance,it VCR1hasS video,use

an S videocable (p/usthe audio cables:)insteadof the

standardvideocable.Howeve/:donot connectboth types

of videocableto VIDEO7(or VIDEO2) at thesame t/?ne

or thepictureperformancewillbe unacceptable.

• ff VCR7hasmonoaudio, connectL/MONO onthe TV(VIDEO 7)

to theaudioout te/minalon VCR Iusingthe wbiteaudio cable

on!g

• Donotconnecttbesame VCRtotbeoutputandinputterminalson

the TVat thesametime,

[] To view the antenna or Cable signal:

Select the ANT-1 video input source on the TV.*

[] To viewVCR h

Turn ON VCR 1. Select the VIDEO 1 video input source

on the TV.*

[] To dub or edit from VCR 1 to VCR 2:

Turn ON both VCRs. Set VCR 2 to the appropriate line

input (refer to }_mr VCR owner's manual for details). Select

the VIDE() 1 video input source on the TV.*

Note:

• /fyou haveaCable,box,connectthe Cableboxand splitterto VCR7

asshownon page 14.

• TbeVIDEOOUTslgnalincorporatesMacrovision®copydgbt

protectiontechnology,whichmaypreventyoufrom recording ce/tain

copyrestrictedvideomaterials._**

* Toselectthe video input source,press INPUTon the remotecontrol

(see page 67).Toprogramthe TV remotecontrolto operateother

devices,seeChapter3.

**Do not connectthe unit through a VCR.Video signalsfed through VCRsmaybe

affected by copyright protection systemsand the picture will be distorted on the TV.

***This product incorporatescopyright protection technology that is protected by

U.S.patentsand other intellectualproperty rights. Useof this copyright protection

technology must be authorizedby Macrovisionand is intended for home and other

limitedpay per viewuses only,unlessotherwise authorizedby Macmvision.

Reverseengineering or disassemblyis prohibked. Macrovisionis a registered

trademark of MacrovisionCorporation.

The unauthorized recording,use, distribution,or revisionof television

programs,videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibitedunder the

CopyrightLaws of the United States and other countries,and maysubject

youto civil and criminal liability.

Fromantennaor Cable

VCR2(records) _

VIDEO

@ IN !rom ANT 0H3_

@ qH4U _- ]

The VIDEO OUT term/ha/doea not output the POP picture,

QWben POP mode is active, the AUDIO OUT term/ba/s output the

sound of tbe active window Cmainor POP), For additional

infom3ation, see "Notes about/ecorTJlng" on page 76.

Note: The VIDEO/AUDIO OUT terminals output signals from the

ANT 7, ANT Z VIDEO 7, VIDEO 2, and VIDEO 3 terminals wber7

the appmprfate input mode L9selected

[] To use the TV Guide On Screen _"recording features:

1. Connect the G-LINK _' cable according to the

instructions on page 25.

2. Make sure the VCR is connected to the A/V OUT

terminals on the TV (see illustration).

3. Set the VCR to the appropriate line input (refer to }_mr

VCR owner's manual for details), and then turn OFF the

VCR.

4. See Chapter 5 fbr details on setting tip the TV Guide

On Screen_''s_tem.

5. See Chapter 7 fbr details on using the TV Guide

On Screen_"s}_tem.

#01E 012-0 5 566272HM195 18

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:14 PM F

ConnectinganHDMIT°ora DVIdevicetotheHDMI input

The HDMI m input on your TV receives digital audio and

uncompressed digital video from an HDMI device or

uncompressed digital video from a DVI [2]device.

This input is designed to accept HDCP r31program material in

digital form from EIA/CEA-861/861 B-compliant r<consumer

dectronic devices (such as a set-top box or DVD player with

HDMI or DVI output).

The HDMI input is designed for best performance with 1080i

signals but will also accept and display 1080i, 480i, and 480p

signals.

INOTE: NEVER CONNECT THIS "IV

TO A PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC).

THISTY ISNOTINTENDEDFORUSEWITHA PC.

To connect an HDMI device, you will need:

•one HDMI cable (type A connector) per HDMI

device

For proper operation, it is recommended that you use as

short an HDM! cable as possible.

HDMt cable transfers both video and audio. Separate

analog audio cables are not required (see illustration

below). Some CDVs (video CDs? may not output digital

audio s/_qnals,tn that case, you may hear sound by

connecting analog audio cables.

See "Setting the HDMI audio mode" on page 50.

t-!am!

[1]

[2]

[8]

[4]

HDMI- High Definition Multimedia Interface.

DVI Digital Video Interface.

HDCP Nigh bandwirJth Digital Content P/otect/on,

EIA/CEA 861/861B compliance covers the tfansmL_sionof

uncomp/essed digital video with high bandwidth digital content

protection, _#hichis being standar&Ted for _ception of high definition

video s4gna/s.Because thL_L_an evolving technology it/_ possible that

some devices may not operate properly with the 77/

Note: Toensure that the HDM/ or DV/ device is f_set

proper!y, it is _commended that you follow these

procedures:

•When turning on your electronic components, turn on

the TV first, and then the HDMI or DVI device.

• When turning offyour electronic components, turn off

the HDMI or Dill device first, and then the Tt/

To connect a DVI device, you will need:

• one HDMI to DVI adapter cable (HDMI vpe A

connector) per DVI device

For proper ope/aOon, the lewth of an HDM/ to DV/ adapter

cable should not exceed 9,8 ft ('_m), The recommended length i_

6 6 ft (2fn).

• one pair of standard analog audio cables per DVI

device

An HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable transfers video only.

Separate analog audio cables are required (see ilhlstration

bdow).

See "Setting the HDMI audio mode" on page 50.

DVI device

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-DefinRionMultimedia Interface

aretrademarks or registeredtrademarksof HDMI LicensingLLC.

#01E 012-025 566272HM195 19

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:14 PM

[

Connectinga digitalaudiosystem

The TV's DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal outputs a Dolby*

DigitalD,[:1_ or 2-channel down-mixed PCM (pulse-code

modulation) signal for use with an external Dolby Digital

decoder or other external audio system with optical audio input.

You will need:

_' one optical audio cable (Use an optical audio cable that has

the larger "TOSlink" connector and not the smaller "mini-

optical" connector)

To control the audio:

Turn on the TV and the digital audio device.

Press MENU on the TV's remote control and open the AUDIO

nlenu.

Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER.

In the Optical Output Format field, select either Dolby Digital

or PCM, depending on your

device (see "Selecting the

optical audio output format"

on page 86).

Reset iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii Done iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii

Turn offthe TV's built-in speakers in the same Audio Setup

menu (above). Also see "Turning off the built-in speakers" on

page 86.

DolbyDigitaldecoderor

=,...... =o.... o..... ,=._ ._o=

......... II .... III..= [ I-

I a

HZIIBI

iOi it --

G4JNK The_terNet

F OB8

Note:

•Some audio systems may not be compatible with Doll_y Digital bitstrearn

signals. Older audio systems that are not compatible with standard

optic'a/out signals may not woA<prope!!}4 creating a high noise level that

may damage speakers or headphones, THIS DAMAGE tS NOT

COVERED BY YOUR WARRANTY

• TheDIGITAL AUDIO OUT te/mina/outputs signals only when receiving

digital broadcasts with the TV /n single window mode

• TheDIGITALAUDlOOUTtelminalmaynotoutputsomed/gitalaud/o

sources because of copy restdctions,

* Manufacturedunder licensefrom Dolby Laboratories.

"Dolby","Pro Logic"and the doubb-D symbolaretrademarksof Dolby

Laboratories.

Connectingananalogaudiosystem

This connection allows }_tl to use external speakers with an

external audio amplifier to adjust the sound level.

You will need..

_' one pair of standard audio cables

To control the audio:

Turn on the TV and the stereo amplifier.

Turn off the TV's built-in speakers (see "Turning off the built-in

speakers" on page 86).

Note: Tohearsound whenusinganexternalaudio amp/ifiet;

the volumeof both the TVand theamplifiermust be set to a

reasonablelistening/eve_

#01E 012-0 5 566272HM195 20

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:15 PM r

Controllinginfraredremote-controlleddevicesthroughtheTV{IRpass-through)

FrontofIR-controlledDVDplayer(forexample)

xfimcan use the TV's IR OUT terminal (infrared pass-through)

to remotely operate (through the TV) many infrared remote-

controlled devices (such as a Toshiba infrared remote-controlled

VCR or DVD player) enclosed within an entertainment center

or similar cabinet. Without the IR OUT connection, the device

9-pically would need to be visible to operate it remotel>

You will need:

I, one dual-wand IR blaster cable (included with your TV)

I, other audio/video cables as required to connect the device(s)

to the TV (see pages 13-20)

To connect the IR blaster cable:

1. Locate the infrared sensor on the front of your device. This

sensor is marked on some devices.*

2. Align one of the IR blaster cable's wands about 1 inch away

from the infrared sensor on the front of the device and

attach it using double-sided mounting tape. If you have a

second device, attach the second wand in a similar manner.

(See i//ust_tation at dg]at.)

Note:/fyou donot haveaseconddevice,coilthesecondwand

w_tha rubberband andleaveitbehind the TH

3. Plug the IR blaster cable's plug into one of the TV's

TheaterNet OUT terminals.

To control the device(s):

Point the TV remote control

(programmed to operate the device;

see Chapter 3) or the device's remote

control at the front of the TV and

press the button for the desired

function. The signal passes from the

remote control through the TV to the

device via the IR blaster cable.

Note: g

•if you use the dev/c'e_ remote control to

ope/ate the device, you also w/2 need to

use the TV3 temote control to operate the TH

• Foradd/t/ona/controlopt/ons, see "TheatedVeton sc/_en dev/c'e

control" at r/gh_

ffyou cannotlocatethe devices hdraredsensor:

LTumOFFthedevice.

2. Starting at thelowerleftcornerofthedevice, place theendofthe

device'sremotecontrolCwiththeinOaf_demitter3 so it touchesthe

frontof thedeviceand p_ss POWER (Do notusethe TV'Sremote

controlfor thisstep,]

&fftbe deviceturnson,thepointat whichthet_motecontroltouched

thedeviceisthelocationof tbesensor

4. fftbedevicedoesnotturnon,movethet_motecontfo/ s//ghtly tothe

_Tgbtandp_ssPOWERagain,

&Repeat step 4 untilyou locatethedevice'sinfraredsensor

Infiared

sensor

IRblastercablewand

{approx.1inchfloradevice)

BackofTV

Frontof IR-controlledaudiodevice(forexample)

I DDDDD

TheaterNef °on-screen device control

For additional control options for

your home theater s)_tem, set up

the TheaterNet on-screen device

control feature. You can use this

feature to control many IR remote-

controlled devices and IEEE1394

devices using the on-screen control

icons.

See pages 45 49 for deta/Yson sett/bg up /_]

and us#TgTheatedVeL

See pages 22 24 for deta/Yson

connect/bg tEEE 7394 devices,

Note: The TbeaterNet on-sct_en /cons are the only device funct/bns

ava#able when the/cons are on screen, Toaccess otbe/ device

functions, close the TheaterNet /con w/bdow

#01E 012-025 566272HM195 21

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:16 PM [

ConnectingIEEE1394videodevices

xfim can use the two hi-directional IEEE1394 ports on the back

of}_)ur TV to connect digital video devices that meet CEA

specifications for IEEE1394.

Because these ports are bi-directional, they can be used for both

playback and recording.

•BecauselEEE1394isanevo/vingtechno/og34itispossib/ethatsome

or allof theconnectivityfeaturesof a deviceyou connectto the TV

thmugl7the tEEE1394portsmaynot operate.Youshould confim7

that thedevicesyou want to usewit/7theIEEE7394 portswilloperate

wtth thosepolts.

• ThisTVdoesnotsupportallpossible IEEE7394sdgna/ty,oes For

infom_ationon signalssuppo/ied by the tEEE1394posts,see

"Suppon'edsignals"at dghL

• IEEE7394cablecaniesbothaudioandvideoinformation;

sepa/ateaudio cablesale not requ#ec._

You will need..

one (or two) IEEE1394 cable(s)

Note: ThetransmLssioncapabilityof /EEEL_94 cableusedwiththis

TVmustbe $400 (400 Mbpsmaximum).

_' additional A/V cables if your device is analog-compatible

(see "Using analog-compatible IEEE1394 devices" below).

IV backpanel

FromIEEE1394

devices (such as

AVHD or D-VHS)

Using analog-compatible IEEE1394

devices

Some digital IEEE1394 devices are compatible with analog

signals. For example, some D-VHS VCRs can record and play

VHS or S-VHS format videos. Such devices allow you to play

analog tapes that you rented or recorded, or record analog

programs from antenna or Cable TV systems. To use the

IEEE1394 device's analog features, )_ti need to connect the

device to the TV using standard A/V cables (or S-video plus

audio cables) in addition to connecting the IEEE1394 cable.

Note: ff you have an I£EE1394 device connected to both digital

and analog inputs on the TV,the TVautomafically switches

between digital and analog modes, as needed, when the initial

device access is initiated using the TheaterNet button.

See page 45 for details on using the TlieatedVet feature

#01E 012-0 5 566272HM195 22

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

NOTE: NEVER CONNECT THIS "IV

TO A PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC).

.......................................THISTV ISNOTINTENDEDFORUSEWITHA PC.

Supported signals

The IEEE1394 ports support only the signals listed below. Even

though incompatible vide(), audio, and digital control signals

cannot be decoded by the TV, these signals may be passed

through the IEEE1394 cable to other compatible devices.

Incompatible devices may not appear in the TheaterNet'* menu.

•MPEG-2 digital video signals

Otherdig/talv/deos/gnals suchas DV video-a/_

incompatibleandmust bedecoded by the sourcedeviceand

sentto the TVasanalogvideo(compositeor S video].

•Dolby Digital and MPEG digital audio signals

Other digital audio signals (,suchas DPM, MP3, and DTS) am

/77compatll_leand cannot be decoded by the 77/,

•EIA-775 and AV/C digital control

Your TV can serve as the control center for many devices

that are compatible with EIA-775 or AV/C IEEE1394

control standards (described below).

TheTVcannotcontroltEEEI394devicesthatuseanyother

controlstandards,

- EIA-775 digital control allows tuning devices (such as

Cable boxes) to send simple graphics; however, this

standard does not allow the TV to control the Cable box

through IEEE 1394.

- AV/C (audio/video control) provides basic control (such

as power, play, stop rewind, first-forward, pause, and

record), as applicable to the specific device.

Using TheaterNef °on-screen device

control

xfimcan use the TheaterNet feature to control some IEEE1394

devices using on-screen control icons. See page 45 for details on

setting tip and using the TheaterNet feature.

Note: If the TlieaterNet feature does not contro/ your

IEEE1394 device, you can either use the device _remote

control or try using tR pass through with the TV_ remote

control (page 2 7),

7/28105, 4:16 PM [

ConnectingIEEE1394videodevices(continued)

Connecting an AVHD [external hard

drive) or D-VHS digital recorder

%u can connect an IEEE1394 compatible D-VHS or AVHD

(audio/video hard drive) digital recorder (such as Toshiba's

S}m_bio_'*AVHD Recorder) to record high definition and

standard definition material from either tuner and control live

TV (pause, rewind, etc.).

When you connect a D-VHS or AVHD device to the "IV,.

•The remote control keys (Live, REW, PAUSE, PLAY,FF,etc.) are

atitomaticallyacdw_wdto allowcontrol of liveTV.

• The TV Guide On Screen"Ms)_tem isautomaticallyconfigured to

albw recording to the device.*SeeChapters 5 and 7 for &mils.

Also seepage 50 l_r &mils on setting theAVHD deviceskip time.

• Some programs may not be recorded due to cop}"protection

restrictions.

Toshiba_SymbioTMAVHDRecorder/sdesignedspecificallyfor

highdefinitiontelevision(HDTV_andofferscontroloverdig#al

videorecordingandplayback.

rh,hkof,tasa"tapelessVCR"fordig, altelev,sionYoucanpause,

rew/hd,oruse/hstantreplaysoyou2nevermissath/w/

Symb/oalsooffersone-touchrecording*of bothstandardand

HighDef/h/tionprogramsthroughtheno-feeTVGuide

OnScreen interactiveprogramguidebuiltinto thisT_/

NOTE: NEVER CONNECT THIS "IV

TO APERSONAL COMPUTER (PC).

THISTV ISNOTINTENDEDFORUSEWITHA PC.

The unauthorizedrecording,use,distribution,or revision of television

programs,videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibitedunder the

CopyrightLaws of the United States and other countries,and maysubject

youto civil and criminal liability.

*Note:To enjoythe fullbenefitsofyour SymbioAVHD Recorder,you

mustfirstset up the TVGuideOn ScreenTMsystem(seeChapter5). _/I

SymbioAVHD Recorderbenefits,includ#?gIntelligentOneTouch

recording willnot beavailableunlessthe TVGuide OnScreenTMsystem

isfullyoperational However, when the TVGuideOn ScreenTMsystemis

notfullyoperational,manualrecordingisavailableaslongas the

TVGukJeOn Screer#Msystemhasacquiredthenecessarydate andtime

data.Ifyou experienceanyissueswithyour SymbioAVHD Recorder,

_leasecontactthe following:

•In the U.S.,call TACPConsumerSolut/bnsat C800]681-3811or v/sit

http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contact.asp.

•hi Canada,callTCLCustomerServiceat b800-268-3404

IEEE1394 device initialization

When you connect a new IEEE 1394 device to the TV and turn

it on, the device immediately announces its presence to the TV

(and other networked IEEE1394 devices if any) and the

following device initialization screen automatically appears.

Note: Withsomedev/c'es,/t may takeup to one m#Tutetb/ this

screento appear

1. If)_)u also connected your IEEE1394 device to an analog

input, use the AV4 • buttons to select the input in the

Analog Input Used field; otherwise, leave it set to "None."

(See "Using analog-compatible IEEE1394 devices" on page

22.)

2. If you want to label the device, highlight Edit Label and

press ENTER.

3. Press the AT4 • buttons to select a character fi_rthe first

space and then press ENTER.

4. Repeat step 3 to enter the rest of the characters.

5. Highlight Done and press ENTER to save the information.

Note:

•TheTVmaynotrecognize#TcompatibleofnonA/VIEEE1394

devices, however; these deviees may still be available to other

compatible tEEEI 394 devices on the netwod<

• Youmay be able to use the TV'_ remote control to operate some

compatible IEEEI 394 devices Youmust f%t program the

remote control to fecogniTe the device (see Chapter 3]. ff you

have an IEEE I394 Cable box or sate/lite ieeelvefi you may need

to use the remote control that came with the device.

• Toshibaisnot liable for the operation of any 1EEEI394 device

other than the Toshiba SFnbio AVHD teco_de/:

#01E 012-025 566272HM195 23

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:17 PM

ConnectingIEEE1394videodevices(continued)

IEEE1394 device management

The IEEE1394 device information is saved in the TV's n_emory.

You can edit this device information (for example, edit the

device name, change the analog input information, or delete the

device information from the TV's memory ify_)u no longer use

that device).

To edit the IEEE1394 device information:

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of

Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in

step 3 below).

iii¸ii¸_i_;iiii_iiii!¸_7::::i!i_j !!!!7!!iiiiiii_i!i¸_iii¸¸_ili!_!iilii!!i!i!i!_iiiiih!ili_

Sleep Timer

iiiiii HDMI 2 Audio Au_ fill

3. Open the Devices menu, highlight IEEE1394 Devices, and

press ENTER.

TheaterNetDevices

4. Highlight the device you want to edit and press ENTER.

Important information regarding IEEE1394

device interconnect/on

•Never loop the last device hi the chahl back to the TV.

If the device chain is looped, the TVmay not work properly with the

other devices if7the chain.

•Always place devices with the slowest communication

speed at the end of each chain, ira device w/ff_a s/ower

communication speed is placed ahead of a faster device in the

chain, the sfgnal from the dower device will interfere wit/} the signal

/torn the faster device Todetennine the communication speed of

an IEEE139 4 device, bok for an "S" number neat the device _

IEEE 7394 connecto/: Thehigher the "S" nun}be/; the faster the

device ff your device Lsnot mad<ed wit/} an "S" number; look #7the

device _ user manual or call the device manufacturer_ technical

support numbel:

•I/your IEEE1396 device has a two-position power

switch, always place the device at the end of the chain

and turn ON the power switch when any device is used.

If the power switch L_OFF, it wi// inteffe/e with signals from devices

beh#Td it in the cba#7.

•The maximum length for an IEEEf394 cable between

each device is 15 feet.

• This TVL_an/EEEIS94A device, The IEEEIS94B protocol/:_ faster

and intefTded to a/low for longer distances betweef7 devices and

multi room systems IEEE7394A-to IEEE 7394B convettefa

(available at some electronics supp/ie_s2may allow compatibility of

IEEE 7394B devices with your existing IEEE 7394A devices

• ThetransmL_sion capability of IEEE1394 cable used witb tbLsTV

must be $400 C4O0 Mbps maximum],

TOSHIBA AVHD MYDEVICE None

Done iiii

5. Follow the on-screen prompts to modi_, the device

information.

#01E 012-0 5 566272HM195 24

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:18 PM F

G-LINKTM connection

• Thisconnection is necessary for the TV Guide On ScreenTMsystem to work with your cable box to receive program listings and to

enable the TV Guide On Screen _recording features with your VCR.

• This connection is not necessary for AVHD or D-VHS recording devices. See pages 23 and 50 for further details.

After }<_uconnect }_mr devices to the TV, }_mwill need to connect the G-LINK _'_cable (either of the dual-wand IR blaster cables

included with your TV) from }_ur VCR and Cable box (if applicable) to the G-LINK _'_terminal on the TV.

Note: TVGuideOr?ScreenTMprogramdataisavailablethrough theANT1andANT2antennainputs andalsothrough the VIDEOI inputs if you

haveacableboxconnectedto VIDEOL TVGuideOnScreenrMpmg/arndata/_notavailabletbroL4gbanyotherinputs on tl?/_77/,Seethe

connectioninformationonpages1325,

The (_;-LINK'' connection is necessary to enable the fi_llowing features ofy_)ur TV Guide On Screen _'_system:

• If}_u have a Cable box, }_ti need to connect the G-LINK '_'_cable from the Cable box to the G-LINK _'_terminal to receive the

TV Guide On Screen_'_program listings for }_mr Cable service.

• If}_u have a VCR, }_tl need to connect the G-LINK _'_cable from the VCR to the G-LINK _'_terminal to use the TV Guide

On Screen_'*recording features.

To connect to the G-LINK '' terminal:

1. Locate the infrared sensor on the front of your VCR or

Cable box. The sensor is marked on some devices.*

FrontofCablebox

Align one of the G-LINK _'_(IR blaster) cable's wands about

1inch away from the infrared sensor on the front of the

VCR and attach it using double-sided mounting tape.

If}_m have a Cable box, attach the other wand in a similar

manner. (See ilh*stration at right.)

Note: Ifyou do nothaveaCablebox,coilthesecond wand

witha robberband andleaveit behindthe TI/

Plug the G-LINK ''_ (IR blaster) cable's plug into the TV's

(_;-LINK_'_terminal.

Infrared

sensor

Frontof VCR

For details on setting up the TV Guide On Screen '= system:

See Chapter 5. %o

For details on using the TV Guide On Screen _" interactive

program guide: _ _I_

See Chapter 7. _ _11 (Q)

.......................................... >

*If you cannot locate the device's infrared sensor:

1 Turn OFF the device

2 Sta/ting at the/owe/left comer of the device, place the end of the

device_ ?emote control Cwitb the inf/ared emitte/3 so it touches the

front of the device and press POWER (Do not use the TV_ ?emote

control for t/?/_sstep.)

3 fftbe device turns on, the point at which the remote control toucbed

the device/_ the location of the sensor ,,_

4 If the device does not turn on, move the/emote control sl?ght/yto the

right and press POWER again.

5 Repeat step 4 untWyou locate the devfce_ infrared sensol7

G-LINK _=(IR blaster) cable wand

(applox. 1 inch flora device)

Back of TV

#OlE 012-025 566272HM195 25

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:18 PM

[

remote control

Learningabout the remote control

The buttons used for operating the TV only are described here. For a

complete list of the remote control's f'unctions, see the remote control

functional key chart on pages 29-30.

For a list of the buttons that operate the TV Guide On Screen_' system, see

page 54.

POWERturns the TV on and off- Press POWER to turn on the TV. The blue

LED indicator on the TV f'ront will be illuminated. Press POWER again to

turn of]"the TV.

Note: The Quick Resta/tTMsetting w/71affect the amount of time it takes for the

pietare to appear when you tam on the 71/See page 5 1for details

SLEEPaccesses the sleep timer (page 91).

LIGHTThe first press of the MGHT button lights the keypad and turns on

the Illumination mode. With the Illumination mode on, pressing any key

lights the keypad f'or 5 seconds (10 seconds if'you're in programming

mode). Subsequent presses of the LIGHT button toggle between turning

the Illumination mode on and of_:

ChannelNumbers([0-9,-1100) directly tune channels. The "-" button is used

to tune digital channels (page 71) or to display the favorite channel list

(page 44).

INPUTselects the video input source (page 67).

MODEcycles through the six remote control device modes: TV, CBL/SAT,

VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO1, and AUDIO2. The mode indicator light will

remain lit l_'ora Jewseconds (page 28).

PlCSIZEcycles through the five pictures sizes:Natural, TheaterWide 1/2/3,

and Full (page 72).

TheaterNet_ DEVICEdisplays a list of available TheaterNet devices (page 45).

TheaterNet_ CTRLaccesses the on-screen IR device control icons (page 46).

MENUaccesses the main TV menu system (pages 35 and 36) or opens a

menu in the TV Guide On Screen_"system (Chapter 7).

TVGUIDEopens the TV Guide On Screen_''system (Chapter 7).

INFOprovides detailed inf'ormation on highlighted items in the TV Guide

On Screen_'' system (Chapter 7).

ENTERactiw_teshighlighted items in the main menu system and the

TV Guide On Screen_'' system.

Arrowbuttons(IY <1IP')When a menu is on-screen, these buttons select or

adjustprogrammingmenus.(Alsosee_ • /_I"on the next page.)

OHAl' cyclesthrough programmed channels when no menu is on-screen

(page 42) and functions as page up/down when a menu ison-screen or when

the TV Guide On Screen*_'system is open (Chapter 7).

ACTION i

TOSHIBA

CT-90233

Note: The error message "Not

Available" w/2 appear ff you press a

key for a function that/s not available

#OlE 026-0 4 566272HM195 26

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:19 PM F

Learningaboutthe remotecontrol(continued)

VOL*iV adjusts the volume level.

EXllcloses on-screen menus and the TV Guide On Screen_"system.

CHRTNreturns to the last viewed channel (page 71), or stops the picture viewer slide show

(page 89).

Livereturns viewing of"the TV back to the live program, while continuing to record to the

Toshiba SymbioTv AVHD recorder (pages 23 and 50).

RECALLdisplays TV setting information on-screen (page 92).

MUlEreduces or turns off"the sound (page 84).

TV/VCRselectsTV mode to view one program while recording another.

SKIP_ and ]_ jump tCorwardand backward one day in the

TV Guide On ScreenT_'listings (Chapter 7).

LISTdisplays the Toshiba SymbioTv AVHD recorder play list (if"available) (page 23).

FAVCHA_' tunes to the next higher/lower favorite channel (page 44).

HOME("_1_)accessesthe home function of the Channel Browser_"feature (page 69)

BACK NEXT

•/_) _ While watching TV, these buttons open the Channel Browser banner and tune

to the previous/next channel in the channel history (page 69). (Also see "Arrow buttons"

on previous page.)

SpI.H"turns the POP feature on and off (page 76) or locks/unlocks the TV Guide

On ScreenT_video window (page 55).

Pie MODEselects the picture mode (page 79).

FAVSCANaccesses the t"avoritechannel search function (page 78).

FREEZEaccesses the t:reezefeature (page 78).

Remote control effective range

Foroptimumperformance,aimthe remote

controldirectlyat theTVandmakesure

thereis noobstructionbetweenthe

remotecontrolandthe lV.

Point remote control

toward remote sensor on

front of TV.

16.4 ft (5m)

#01E 026-034 566272HM195 27

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:20 PM

Installingthe remotecontrolbatteries

To install the remote control batteries:

Caution: Always dispose of batteries in a designated disposal location. Never

throw batteries into a fire.

1. Slide the battery cover off'the back of the remote control.

Install two "AA" size alkaline batteries. Match the + and - symbols on

the batteries to the symbols oil the battery compartment.

oI 6_o...........................

3. Slide the battery cover on to the remote control until the lock snaps.

Caudon:

Neverthrow batterlasrbto a fl_e,

Note:

•Be sure to use AA size batteries.

• Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area.

• Batteries should always be disposed of witb tbe

environment in mind. Always dispose of batteries in

accordance witb applicable laws and regulations.

• ff tbe remote control does not operate correctly, or if

ttre operating range becomes reduced, replace

batteries witb new ones.

• Wben necessary to replace batteries in tbe remote

control, always replace barb batteries witb new ones.

Never mix battery types or use new and used batteries

in combination.

• Always remove batteries from remote control if tbey

are dead or if tbe remote control is not to be used for

an extended period of time. Tbis will prevent battery

acid from leaking irrto ttre battery compartmenL

Usingthe remotecontrolMODEbuttonto controlyourother devices

Your TV remote control has one dedicated TV mode and five programmable

multi-brand modes: CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO 1, and AUDIO 2. The

default device modes and programmable device modes are listed below.

Note: TheTglemote controlL_p/eprog/ammedto operatemost Tosblbadevices,tf

you ownanon TosbibadeviceoraTosbibadevicethatthe _ernotecontroli:_not

preprograrnmedto operate,you willneed to program theremote control See

"Programming theremotecontrol to operateyour other devices"onpage 31

1) TV Toshiba TV

2) CBL/SAT Toshiba Satellite receiver

3) VCR/PVR Toshiba VCR

4) DVD Toshiba DVD

5) AUDIO 1 Pioneer Audio receiver

6) AUDIO 2 Pioneer LD

Number(1-6)

1) TV Toshiba TV

2) CBL/SAT

3) VCR/PVR

4) DVD Multi-brand video/audio devices

5) AUDIO 1

6) AUDIO 2

You can directly select the device mode by pressing the corresponding

number button (1-6) while pressing the MODE button.

Note:

A/tbougb your new TV_ _emote control includes

codes for many devices, it may not include

codes forsome or all of the features on ce_tarn

devices you wLsbto controL if you are unable to

program the TVtsremote control to operate

your device or some of the features on tbat

device, use tbe device's remote control or tbe

controls on the device.

#01E 026-0 4 566272HM195 28

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:20 PM [

RemoteControlfunctionalkeychart

Remote control device mode selection

Lights tile remote ke> and toggles between enabled and

Power

Digit I

Digit 2

Digit 3

Digit 4

Digit 5

Digit 6

Digit 7

Digit 8

Digit 9

Digit 0

Sleep timer

Power

Digit 1

Digit 2

Digit 3

Digit 4

Digit 5

Digit 6

Digit 7

Digit 8

Digit 9

Digit 0

- (digital

separator)

TV/Video

select

Selects the

image shape.

Menu/

Cui, eMe.u

TV Guide

Guide Info

TheaterNet

Device

TheaterNet

Control

Enter

Menu select

down

Menu select

lel:t/right

Exit

<.......................TV

< TV

Power

Digit I

Digit 2

Digit 3

Digit 4

Digit 5

Digit 6

Digit 7

Digit 8

Digit 9

Digit 0

- (s.b

channel)

......................TV

< Tv

Action,

Guide

INFO

Po%ve r

Digit I

Digit 2

Digit 3

Digit 4

Digit 5

Digit 6

Digit 7

Digit 8

Digit 9

Digit 0

100

Enter, Select

Menu select

down

Menu select

left/right

Exit

+ TV

< TV

disabled Illumination mode. *I

Power

Digit I

Digit 2

Digit 3

Digit 4

Digit 5

Digit 6

Digit 7

Digit 8

Digit 9

Digit 0

+10

....................... WV

< TV

DVD setup

Top menu

Subtitle

Audio

Enter

Menu select

down

Menu select

left/right

DVD clear

Power

Digit 1

Digit 2

Digit 3

Digit 4

Digit 5

Digit 6

Digit 7

Digit 8

Digit 9

Digit 0

Power Power

AV input 1 Digit 1

AV input 2 Digit 2

AV input 3 Digit 3

AV input 4 Digit 4

CD Digit 5

Tuner Digit 6

Phono Digit 7

Cassette Digit 8

Aux Digit 9

--- Digit 0, 10

TV ......................TV

< TV = TV

Channel ---

up/down

Volume Volume

up/down .2 up/down .2

...................... TV

<_ TV

Guide

INFO

ADVANCE

Eilter

Menu select

down

Menu select

left/right

EXIT

Channel Channel Channel Channel --- Channel

up/down, up/down up/down up/down up/down

Pageup/down

Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume Volume

up/down .2 up/down .2 up/down .2 up/down .2 up/down .2 up/down .2

Previous Previous Previous --- DVD ---

channel channel channel return

Live ............ Live TV

On-screen ......... On-screen --

display display

#01E 026-034 566272HM195 29

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:21 PM

RemoteControlfunctional keychart(continued)

Sound mute .2 Sound mute .2

Skip FWD

Skip REW ---

Rewind ---

Pause ---

Play ---

Fast FWD --

Stop ---

REC Menu ---

(Single Click)

LIST ---

FAV d_annel ---

up/down

HOME ---

Spli t < TV

PIC MODE TV

FAV SCAN ---

Freeze _ TV

Sound mute .2 Sound mute .2

SlowFWD

--- Rewind

--- Pause

--- Play

--- Fast FWD

TV/SAT TV/VCR

--- Stop

--- Record

Double Click)

TV <.......................TV

÷ TV < TV

< TV <.......................TV

Sound mute *: Sound mute .2

SlowFWD

Slow REW ---

Skip FWD

Skip REW ---

Rewind ---

Pause ---

Play ---

Fast FWD ---

Disc shift AM/FM

Stop ---

< TV <.......................TV

< TV < TV

< TV <.......................TV

Sound mute .2 Sound mute .2

SlowFWD

Skip FWD

Skip REW

Rewind Rewind

Pause Pause

Play Play

Fast FWD Fast FWD

--- Reverse

Disc shif'r Replay

Stop Stop

--- Record

(DoubleClick)

TV -_c TV

TV < TV

< TV < TV

Notes:

" " key does not send assgna/in that _mote contfL_/mode.

• "< TV" =key will affect the TV, even though the remote control is not in TVmode.

sBacklight key/29toggle Does not send tR signal

.2 Volume will affect the TVby default When the volume is unlocked, all the devices will have theft own volume if theft tD has volume data

TheAUDIO modes Oece/ver; CD_ will have their own volume/f volume lock/,9 set on Tg, CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, or DVD mode. See

"Using the volume loci< feature" on page 32,

#01E 026-0 4 566272HM195 30

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:21 PM

Programmingthe remotecontrolto operateyourotherdevices

Device code setup

1. Refer to the multi-brand remote control device code table

on pages 33-34 to find the code fbr the brand of your

device.

If more than one code islisted, try each one separately until

}_ti find one that works.

2. Press MODE until the Mode indicator for the device

(CBL/SAT, VCR/PVR, DVD, AUDIO 1, AUDIO 2) lights

tip.

3. While holding down the RECALL button, press the

Channel Number buttons to enter the four-digit code for

}_mr brand of&vice. Ira valid code is entered, the mode

indicator will blink twice. If an invalid code is entered, the

mode indicator will blink one long blink.

4. Point the remote control at the device and press POWER to

test the code.

If the device responds to the remote control:

_)u have entered the correct code.

If the device does not respond to the remote control:

You may have entered the wrong code. Repeat steps 3

and 4 using another code.

Note: In addition to POWER, confi[m that all necessa/y keys

on the TV remote control operate your device, ff some keys

a/_ not operational, t_peat the device code setup using

anothercode(ifothercodesaf_listedforyourdevice],If,

aftert/ying allIlatedcodes,thenecessa/ykew donotoperate

your device,usethedevice3ofTginal remotecontro[

5. To control the TV, repeatedly press MODE to select "TV."

Note:

•Although the TV remote control includes codes for many devices, it may

not include codes for some or all of the features on ce/1.aindevices you

want to controZ ff you are unable to program the TV femote control to

operate your device or some of the features on that device, use the

device t_remote control or the cont/ols on the device

• Eachtffneyouchangethebattedesyouwillneedto_programthe

remote contro_

• Sofbe newer VCRs tespond to either of two codes These VCRs have a

switch labeled "VCRT/VCR2 _ff your VCR has thL_kind of switch and

does not respond to the codes for your VCR bland, set the switch to the

other position C"VCR1" or "VCR2") and t_pmgram the remote control

Searching and sampling the code of

a device (8500}

If?_m do not know the device code for a particular device, you

can cycle the remote control through the available codes for that

device mode and sample the functions to find the code that

operates the target device. The ke?_ available to be sampled,

provided they are applicable to that mode, are POWER, 1,

VOL •, CH •, and PLAY. Invalid ke?_will be ignored while in

program mode.

To cycle through each available device code and sample its

functions:

1. Press MODE to select the mode you want to set tip.

2. While holding down RECALL, press 8 - 5 - 0 - 0. The

remote control will enter program mode.

3. Point the remote control at the target device and press

POWER (or other function buttons that are available to be

sampled).

4. If tl_edevice re,_0n_Z_"to the _'mote contt_k

Press RECALL to store the device code. The mode

indicator will blink twice and the remote control will exit

the program mode.

If the device doesnot re,_ond m the ,_,motecont*v/:

Press •, and then press POWER. Repeat this step until

the device responds to the remote control, and then press

RECALL.

Note: When a search cycle is completed, the mode

indicator will blink three times. The remote control will

begin to cycle through the available codes again, ff no

key is pressed within 10 seconds while programming, the

f_mote control will exit the program mode and retum to

the previous code.

s_ow sKiP

-- POWER

-- Numbers

MODE

CH •

VOL•

RECALL

#01E 026-034 566272HM195 31

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:21 PM

[

Programmingtheremotecontroltooperateyourotherdevices(continued)

Usingthe volume lock feature (8000)

For the TV, CABLE/SAT, VCR, and [)VD modes, the w4ume

controls (VOL Ay and MUTE) can be locked to the selected

device mode. This feature does not apply to the AUDIO 1 and

AUDIO 2 modes.

To lock the volume controls to always control the

CABLE/SAT device volume (for example):

1. Repeatedly press MODE to select CABLE/SAT mode.

2. While holding down the RECALL button, press 8 - 0 - 0 - 0.

3. PressVOL A.

The CABLE/SAT mode light will blink two times (locked).

To reset the volume controls to the original device mode:

1. While holding down RECALL, press 8 -0-0-0.

2. PressVOL V.

The mode light will blink fbur times (unlocked).

Operational feature reset (8900)

This feature clears all programmed remote control features not

related to "Device code setup" and resets the V_)lumeLock to "TV."

To reset the features:

While holding down the RECALL button, press 8 -9 -0 - 0.

The Mode indicator will blink two times, and then pause

and blink two more times.

m Numbers

MODE

-- VOLAV

J RECALL

#OlE 026-0 4 566272HM195 32

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:22 PM r

Multi-brandremotecontroldevicecodes

VCRs/PVRs

Brand Code

ADMIRAL 0135

AIWA (/127, (t132, (/I 81

AKAI 0129, 0114, 0115,

0116

AUDIO 1,)YNAMIC 0139, 0111

BELL&HOWELL 0105, 0113

BROKSONIC 0120, 0126, 018(1

CANON 0123, 0125

CCE 0143

CITIZEN 01(16

CRAIG 01(t5, 0129, 01(t6

CURTIS MATHES 0145, 0124, 0127

DAEWOO 0143, 0101,0124,

0175

DBX 0139, O110, 0111

DIMENSIA 0145

EMERSON 0143, (t126, 0119,

01(t3, 0125, 0142,

0120, 0118

FISHER 0105, 0108, 01(t9,

01(t7, 0113, 0165

FUNAI 0127, 0126, 0120,

0134

GE 0133, 0145, 0124

GO VI1,)EO 0137, 0151, 0163,

0149, 0150, 0182

GOLDSTAR 01(16

GRA1,)IENTE 0170, (1171, (1168,

0134, 0156

HITACHI 0123, 0145, 0100,

0127, 0168

INSTANT REPLAY 0124, 0123

JENSEN 0139

[VC 0139, 0110, 01 I 1,

0134, 0157, 0158,

0184, 0185, 7104

KENWOO1,) 0139, 0110, 0106,

0111

LG 0159

LXI 0127, (t106, 01(t0,

01(t7, 0108, 0105,

01(t9

MAGNAVOX 0131, 0123, 0124,

0173

MARANTZ 0139, 0110, 0111

MARTA 01(t6

MEMOREX 0124, 0109

MGA 0138, 0140, 0147,

0148, 0141, 0142

MINOLTA 0100, 0145

MITSUBISHI 0138, 0140, 0147,

0148, (t141, 0142,

0161, (t164

MULTITECH 0147, 0127, 0104

NEC 0139, 0110, 0111,

0134

OLYMPIC 0124, 0123

OPTIMUS 0128, 0121,0135,

01(t6

ORION 0126, 0120, 0132

PANASONIC 0123, 0124, 0121,

0122

PENNEY 0124, 0100, 0145,

01(t5, 0139, 0110,

0111

PENTAX 01(t0, 0111,0145

VCRs/PVRs (cont.}

Brand Code

PHIL(;(.) !-/131, (t124, (/127,

0123, (1126, 012(t,

0143

PHILIPS 0131, 0123, 0124,

0173

PION EER 0123

PROSCAN 0145, 0100, 0123,

0124, 0131, 0146,

0101, (t1(t2, 0133

QUASAR 0121, 0122, 0123,

0124

RA1,)IO SHACK 0133, 0124, 0105,

0136, 0109, 0140,

0127

RCA 0133, 0145, 0100,

0123, (t124, 0131,

0146, 0101, 0102,

0170, 0172, 0174,

0176,0183

REALISTIC 0124, 01 (15,0136,

0109, (tl4(t, 0127

Replay TV 7102

SAMSUNG 0137, 0102, 0104,

0133

SAMT RC)N 0163

SANSUI 0139, 0126, 0120,

0152

SANYO 0105, (tl09, 0113

SCOTT 0101, 0102, 0104,

0109, 0138, 0140,

0147, (t148, 0126

SEARS 0105, 0106, 0107,

0108, 0100

SHARP 0135, 0136, 0167,

0162

SHINTOM 0117

SIGNATURE 2000 0127,(tl35

SINGER 0117

SONY 0128, (t129, 0130,

0153, (1154, 0155,

7101

SV2000 0127

SYLVANIA 0131, 0123, 0124,

0127, (t178

SYMPHONIC 0127, 0168, 0177

TASHIRO 0106

TATUNG 0139, 0110, 0111

TEAC 0139, 01 I(1, 0127,

0111

TECHNICS 0121, 0122, 0123,

(tl24

TEKNICA 0124, (t127, 0112

THOMSON 0179, 0183

Tivo 7100, 7101

TOSHIBA 0101, 0146, 0166,

(tl60

VECTOR RESEARCH 0111

WARDS 0135, 0136, 0109,

0144, 01(t6

YAMAHA 0105, (tl39, 011(1,

0111

ZENITH 0144, 0106, 0169,

0180

Cable boxes

Brand Code

ABC I 124

ARCHER 1132, 1125

CABLEVIEW 1105, 1132

CITIZEN 1122, 1105

CURTIS 1112, 1113

DIAMOND 1124, 1132, 1125

EAGLE 1129

EASTERN 1134

GCBRAN1,) 1132, 1105

GEMINI 1122, 1143

G.I./JERROLD 1119, 1124, 1125,

1126, 1127, 1120,

1121, 1122, III1,

1123, 1152

HAMLIN 114(/, 1141, 1142,

1145, 1118, 1112

HITACHI I 1(t3, 1124

MACOM 1103, 1104, 1105,

I 1(18

MAGNAVOX 1133

MEMOREX 1130

MOVIETIME 1132, 1105

OAK 1139, 1137, 1102

PANASONIC 11(t9, 1110, I 114,

1151, 1153

PHILIPS 1128, 1129, 1130,

11(t6, 1107, 1150,

1131

PIONEER 1101, I I I6

PULSAR 1I (15, 1132

PUSER 1132

RCA I 115

REALISTIC I 132

REGAL 1112, 1118, 1140,

1141, 1142, 1145,

1149

REGENCY I 134

REMBRANT I 137, 1132, I 105,

1138

SAMSUNG I I(15

S.A. 1111,1112,1113

SLMARK 1105, 1101

SPRUCER 1105, I I I0

STARGATE 1132, 1105

TELECAPTION I 148

TELEVIEW 1101, 1105

TEXSCAN 1144

TOCOM 1135, 1136, 1147

TOSHIBA 1104, 1146

UNIKA 1132, 1125

UNIVERSAL I 122, 1132

VIDEOWAY I 106

VIEWSTAR 1129, 1130

ZENITH I I 17, 1100

ZENITH/1,)RAKE I 100

SATELLITE

#01E 026-034 566272HM195 33

Black

(E) 56162/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:22 PM

Multi-brandremotecontroldevicecodes(continued)

CD players

Brand Code

ADMIRAL 6126

AIWA 6133, 6135

CARVER 6129

DENON 6142,6151

EMERSON 6139

FISHER 61()5, 6106

GARRARD 6117

HARMAN/KARDON 6120,6121,6123,

6119

HITACHI 61(17

JENSEN 6134

JVC 6140, 6141, 6145,

6148,6151

KENWOOD 6100, 6101, 61 I I,

6145

LXI 6136

MAGNAVOX 6129, 6132

MARANTZ 6129

MACINTOSH 6121

NAKAMICHI 6110

ONKYO 6114, 6115

OPTIMUS 61(t8, 6118, 6120,

6122

PANASONIC 6124, 6125, 6127,

6150

PHILIPS 6129, 6130, 6149

PIONEER 61(18

QUASAR 6125, 6127, 6124

RCA 6147, 6137, 6138,

6131,6152

SANSUI 6110, 6146, 6113

SANYO 61(15

SCOTT 6110, 6146

SHARP 6142, 6143

SHERWOOD 6120

SONY 6128

SOUNDE-SIGH 6144

TEAC 6112, 6116, 6118

TECHNICS 6127, 6124, 6125

VICTOR 6140, 6141, 6145

YAMAHA 61(t2, 6103, 6104

Receivers

Brand Code

ADMIRAL 412{-/

AIWA 4125, 4126, 4146

DENON 4134, 4135, 4136,

4143

FISHER 4104

GARRARD 4113

HARMAN KARDON 4115,4123,4145

JENSEN 4129

JVC 4132, 4133, 4140,

4144

KENWOOD 4100, 4108, 4141,

4142,4147

MAGNAVOX 4127, 4128

MARANTZ 4124

MCNTOSH 4116

MITSUBISHI 4148

NAKAMICHI 4106, 41 ] 7

ONKYO 4109, 41 ]4

OPTIMUS 4103, 4127, 4131,

4130

PANASONIC 4119,4118,4121

PHILIPS 4123

Receivers (cont.)

Brand Code

PlON EER 41{-/5,41 (17,415(1

QUASAR 4119, 4118, 4121

RCA 4103, 41(t5, 4127,

4131,4130, 4149

SANS UI 4103, 4111, 4139

SHARP 4134, 4137

SONY 4122

SOUNDE-SIGH 4138

TEAC 4112,4113,4111,

4110

TECHNICS 4121, 4118, 4119

VICTOR 4132, 4133

YAMAHA 4101,41 (12

Laser disks

Brand Code

DENON 5114

HITACHI 5100

KENWOOD 5102, 5103

MAGNAVOX 5101

MARANTZ 5114

MITSUBISHI 5114, 5118, 5119

NEC 5114

PANASONIC 5104, 5105, 5106,

5115

PHIEIPS 5111

PIONEER 5114

PROSCAN 5114

QUASAR 5104, 51(t5, 5106,

5115

RCA 5114

SAMSUNG 5112

SANYO 5114, 5117

SHARP 5113, 5116

SONY 5107, 51(t8, 5109,

5110

TEAC 5114

TOSHIBA 5114

YAMAHA 5101

DVD players

Brand Code

AIWA 3123

APEX 3120

DENON 3100, 3117

FERGUSON 3101

HITACHI 3111

[VC 31 (19

KENWOOD 3115, 3129

KONKA 3119

MITSUBISHI 31 (15

NORDMENDE 3101

ONKYO 3121

ORITRON 3124

PANASONIC 3100

PHILIPS 31 (13,3116

PIONEER 3102

RAITE 3113

RCA 31(tl, 3106

SABA 31(tl

SAMPO 3114

SAMSUNG 31 I(1

SHARP 31 (18

SYLVANIA 3132, 3118

SMC 3125

SONY 3104, 3126, 3127,

3128

TECHNICS 3100

THOMSON 3101

TOSHIBA 31 (13

WAVE 3122

YAMAHA 3100, 3130

ZENITH 31(t7, 3112

VIALTA 3131

FUNAI 3132, 3118

Satellite receivers

Brand

DISH NETWORK

(Echostar)

ECHOSTAR

EXPRESS VU

G.E.

G.I.(GENERAL

INSTRUMENT)

GRADIENTE

HITACHI

HNS(Hughes)

MAGNAVOX

PANASONIC

PHILIPS

PRIMESTAR

PROSCAN

RCA

SONY

STAR CHOICE

TOSHIBA

UNIDEN

Code

2105,2115,2116,

2117

2105

21(t5,2115

2106

2108

2114

2103,2111,2112

2103

2101,2102

2104

2101,2102,2118

2108

2106,2109,2110,

2113

2106,2109,2110,

2113

21(t7

21(t3, 2108

21(t0, 2103, 2119,

2120,2121,2122,

2123,2124,2125

21(tl,2102

#01E 026-0 4 566272HM195 34

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:22 PM F

The illustrations below and on the next page provide a quick overview of your TV's menu system.

Main menulayout

To open the main menus (illustrated below), press MENU on the remote control or TV control panel.

r _TV Guide On Screen_M_ Launch Gemstar/TV GUIDE

_ Audio Player _ Launch MP3 audio player

Applications _ Picture Viewer _ Launch the picture viewer

_ Digital CC /Audio Selector _ Launch the ATSC Digital CC Selector

CableCARDT'__ Dynamic list of items provided by inserted CableCARD_M.

(This option is not available if a CableCARDT'_is not inserted.)

_Video

E icture Settings _ [ Picture Settings Edit Window ]

Advanced Picture Settings _ [ Advanced Picture Settings Edit Window ]

Theater Settings _ [ Theater Settings Edit Window ]

--* iii Audio E Audio Settings _ [ Audio Settings Window ]

Advanced Audio Settings _ [ Advanced Audio Settings Window ]

Audio Setup _ [ Audio Setup Window ]

Preferences

FavoriteChannels _ [ Favorite Channels Edit Window ]

Closed Caption Mode _ Off /CC1 /CC2 /CC3 /CC4 /T1/T2 /T3/T4

Closed Caption Advanced _ [ Advanced Closed Captions Window ]

Input Labeling _ [ Input Labeling Edit Window ]

Menu Language _ English /Frangais/Espafiol

Home CH Setup _ [ Home channel Setup Window ]

,___)

Locks

Enable Rating Blocking _ Off/On

Edit Rating Limits _ [ Edit Rating Limits Edit Window ]

Channels Block _ [ Channels Block Edit Window]

Input Lock _ Off /Video /Video+

Front Panel Lock _ Off/On

GameTimerT'__ Off /30 Min /60 Min /90 Min /120 Min

New PIN Code _ [ New PIN Code EntryWindow ]

Installation _ [ Installation sub rnenu is launched (see page

36 for details) ]

Sleep Timer _ [ Sleep Timer Edit Window ]

On/Off Timer _ [ On/Off Timer window ]

HDMI I Audio _ Auto /Digital/Analog

HDMI 2 Audio _ Auto /Digital /Analog

Slide Show Interval _ 2 sec./5 sec, /10 sec./15 sec./20 sec,

AVHD Skip Time _ I min./3 min./5 rain./15 rain.

Gray Level _ 1/2/3

Quick Restart _ Off/On

When the TV is in one of the modes

listed below, the menu backgrounds

will appear black. This is normal

and is not a sign of malflmction.

• A 1080 signal is being received.

• The selected input source is

ColorStreamHD 1 or ColorStream

HD2.

#OlE 035-036 566272HM195 35

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:23 PM

[

Setup/Installationmenulayout

To open the Installation menu (illustrated below), press MENU on the remote control or TV control panel, open the Setup menu,

select Installation, and press ENTER.

From Main Menu/Setup

menu, select 'Installation"

sub-menu --,

---+

Terrestrial

Input Configuration _ [ Input Configuration Window ]

ANTI 1

ChannelProgram[ ANT2 J _ [Scan fornew channelson desiredAntenna]

ChannelAdd/Delete_ [ChannelAdd /DeleteWindow ]

SignalMeter -_ [SignalMeterWindow ]

Devices F IEEE1394 Devices _ [ IEEE1394 Device Managernent Window ]

LTheaterNet Devices _ [ TheaterNet Setup Window ]

TV Guide On Screen TMSetup -_ Start _ [ Launches TV Guide On Screen_Msystern setup ]

Time and Date _ Start Setup _ [ Time And Date Setup Window ]

System Status _ System Information _ [ Systern Information Window ]

Navigatingthemenusystem

You can use the buttons on the remote control or TV control

panel to access and navigate your TV's on-screen menu s)_tem.

• Press MENU to open the menu s}_tem.

• Use the up/down/left/right arrow buttons (AV._ _,) on the

remote control or TV control panel to move in the

corresponding direction in a menu.

• Press ENTER to save }_mrmenu settings or select a

highlighted item. (A highlighted menu item appears in a

different color in the menu.)

• All menus close automatically if you do not make a

selection within 60 seconds, except the signal meter menu

which closes automatically after 5 minutes.

• To close a menu instantl> press EXIT.

TVcontrolpanel

POWER

(ENTER*)_I

*The MENU button on the

TV control panel functions

as the ENTER button

when a menu I_

OR Screen.

Remote control

®®®

+1o

®®® MENU

-- ENTER

-- EXIT

#01E 035-0 6 566272HM195 36

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:23 PM F

WGuide gcreed Msetup

Settingupthe TV GuideOnScreeWMsystem

The TV Guide On Screen _'_s}_tem in }_mr TV is a no-fee

interactive program guide that uses the information you enter

during the following setup process to provide you with a

channel lineup and program listings for }_mr area. The listings

are automatically updated several times a da>

Note:

•Youmustfi/stsetupyourTVaccord#Tgtotheapp/_cab/e

connectioninst/zJctionsif7OY}apte/2.

• If youconnecteda Toshiba,5._mGid ° AVHD Reco_de/;you

mustpe/9/m thefollowingTVGuideOnScreenT'_systemsetup

#7order to use theSymb/otsfull functionality/Seepages23 and

50for ft#27erdeta#saboutAVHD digital_ecorders

Toset up the TV Guide On Screen _"system:

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER.

A new set of Installation

menu icons appears

on-screen (see

illustration at right).

Open the TV Guide

On Screen_''Setup

menu, highlight Start,

and press ENTER.

The following screen appears. Highlight "Set tip TV Guide

On Screen_'' now" and press ENTER to continue.

5. The following screen appears. Press ENTER to continue.

Configuring the location of your TV

Screen h Select the TV location (USA or Canada), and then

press ENTER.

Screen 2: Enter the ZIP code (U.S.A.) or postal code (Canada)

for }_mrlocation (use the Number buttons on the remote

control for numbers and the AY but[ons for letters), and

then press ENTER. Screen 3 appears.

Screen 3: Do you have Cable service connected?

If you select Yes(and press ENTER), screen 4 appears.

If you select No (and press ENTER), screen 12 appears.

Screen 4: Do you have a Cable box connected?

If you select Yes(and press ENTER), screen 5 appears.

If you select No (and press ENTER), screen 13 appears.

#01E 037-040 566272HM195 37

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:24 PM

SettinguptheTVGuideOnScreeWMsystem(continued)

Screen 5: Which TV input is your cable box plugged into?

If you select ANT 1, screen 6 appears.

If you select Video 1,screen 7 appears.

Screen 6: Select the channel your TV is tuned to when using

your cable box, and then press ENTER. Screen 7 appears.

Screen 7: The on-screen diagram shows the correct way to

connect )_)urCable box to the G-LINK T''terminal on the

TV. Make sure the G-LINK 1"cable is installed properly.

For additional details, see page 25.

Press ENTER to display screen 8.

Screen 8: Highlight your Cable box brand, and then press

ENTER to display screen 9.

Screen 9: To allow the TV Guide On Screen _'*s)_tem to find

the correct code for your brand of Cable box, tune your

Cable box to channel 02, leave the Cable box and TV ON,

and then press ENTER. Screen 10 appears.

Screen 10: The TV Guide On Screen _'_s}_tem will test the code

for the brand of Cable box }_u selected. Do not press any

keys on the TV, remote control, or Cable box until the

testing process is completed. When testing iscompleted,

screen 11 appears.

Screen 1h If your Cable box tuned itself to channel 09 after

testing, select Yesand press ENTER. If you selected ANT 1

in screen 5, screen 13 appears. If)_)ti selected Video 1 in

screen 5, screen 12 appears.

If}_mr Cable box did not tune itself to channel 09 after

testing and you want to test the same code again, select

"Test this code again" and press ENTER.

If}_m want to test a different code, select No and press

ENTER. Screen 10 appears.

Note: Many cableboxes_equire testsngmorethanonecode.

(Continued on next?age)

#01E 037-0 0 566272HM195 38

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:25 PM [

SettinguptheTVGuideOnScreeWMsystem(continued)

Screen 121 Do )_m have an antenna connected?

Select either Yes or No, and then press ENTER. Screen 13

appears.

Note: IfyouselectedNOh7screen3, youmust select Y£Sh7

thisscreento receivea channellineupandprogram/ist/fTgS

Screen 13: Are the settings correct?

If you select Yes screen 14 appears.

If you select No screen 1 appears.

Screen 14: Congratulations! You have completed basic

TV Guide On Screen _"s)_tem setup.

Note: Readthe on-screeninformation/ega_d/ngtheamount

of time itmay takefor/ist#Tginformationto down/oadfrom

the TVGuideOnScreen_Mservice.

Press ENTER to display screen 15.

Screen 15t Is a VCR connected?

If you select Yes screen 16 appears.

If you select No screen 21 appears.

Screen 161The on-screen diagram shows the correct way to

connect your VCR to the G-LINK '_'_terminal on the TV.

Make sure the G-LINK _"cable is installed properly. For

additional details, see page 25.

Press ENTER to display screen 17.

Screen 17: Selectyour VCR brand, and then press ENTER.

Screen 18 appears.

Screen 18: Turn on your VCR insert a tape (either blank or

previously recorded), and then press PLAY.Screen 19

appears.

Screen 19t The TV Guide On Screen _'_s)_tem will test the code

for the brand ofVCR )_m selected. Do not press any ke)_

on the TV, remote control, or VCR until the testing process

is completed. When testing is completed, screen 20 appears.

#01E 037-040 566272HM195 39

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:25 PM

[

SettinguptheTVGuideOnScreeWMsystem(continued)

Screen 20: If)_mr VCR stopped playing the tape after testing,

select Yesand press ENTER. Screen 21 appears.

If your VCR did not

stop playing the tape

after testing and you

want to test the same

code again, select

"Test this code again"

and press ENTER.

If you want to test a different code, select No and press

ENTER. Screen 19 appears.

Note: Many VCRsrequ#etestingmore thanone code.

Screen 2h Review the setup information displayed oil )_mrTV

screen (an example is shown below).

If the information oil

)_ttr TV screen is

correct for your setup,

select "Yes,end setup"

and press ENTER.

Screen 22 appears.

If the information is incorrect, select "No, repeat setup

process" and press ENTER. Screen 1 appears.

Screen 22: Congratulations! You have successfully completed

TV Guide Oil Screen _'*system setup.

Press ENTER to

display screen 23.

Screen 23: This screen provides helpful information oil using

)_mrTV Guide Oil Screen_'*system.

Press ENTER to exit

the TV Guide Oil

Screen _ setup and

watch TV.

TV Guide On ScreenTM Reminder

The TV Guide On Screen_'_system receives program listings

data through your Cable or over-the-air video signal. In

order to receive regular program listing updates, remember

to do the following:

1. Leave the TV in standby mode when it is not in use

by turning it OFF but leaving the power cord

plugged in.

2. If)_m have a Cable box connected, leave it ON.

3. If)_m }lavea VCR connected, turn it OFF when not

in use. (Do not unplug the power cord.) See page 13

for VCR connection instructions.

If)_)u have more than one Cable s)_tem in your area,

)_m may be prompted to select which Cable system's

program data to download. If so prompted, follow the

on-screen instructions.

Note: ff the TV powel cold L_unplugged for an

extended pedod of time, it may take up to 24 hour:_ wit/}

the TVif} standby mode (powe/ cold plugded if} and

power OFF] to download the TV Guide On Sc/_en TM

program schedule. It may take up to a week before an

entire program sdledule L_available,

Turningoffthe TV GuideOn ScmeW"

automaticdisplayfeature

After )_tt set up the TV Guide On Screen_'*s)_tem, the

program guide will display atttomatically (by de£mlt) when

)_u turn on the TV. To turn off the atttomatic program

guide:

1. PressTV GUIDE oil the remote control to open the

TV Guide Oil Screen_Msystem (if it is not already

open).

2. Use the _ _" buttons to select the Setup menu.

3. Use the A_' buttons to select "Change Default

Options," and then press ENTER.

4. Use the AV buttons to select "General Defaults," and

then press ENTER.

5. Set the "Auto Guide" option to Of_"

6. Use the AV buttons to select Done, and then press

ENTER.

#01E 037-0 0 566272HM195 40

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:26 PM F

#i#g W

For menu nav/_Tat/oninstructions, see Chapter 4,

Selectingthemenulanguage

You can choose from three different languages (English, French

and Spanish) fi}r the on-screen display of menus and messages.

(The TV Guide On Screen _'_menus are in English, regardless of

the language selected in this menu.)

To select the menu languaget

1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.

2. Highlight Menu Language and press _.

3. Press • or • to select your preferred menu language and

press ENTER.

Home OH Setup

4. Press EXIT to close the Preferences menu.

Configuringtheantennainput

sources

To configure the ANT 1and ANT 2input sources:

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of

Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in

step 3 below.)

or,J6t_Tim_7

HDMii AGdio Xui3

;_DMiD,_di_ Auio

girl8g*,0wi,,ia;vai _gg

Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Input Configuration,

and press ENTER.

Note: TheTerrestrialmenumay notbe accessibleCitemswill

be "grayedout"J#7some instances(forexample,if a oable

boxis connectedto theANT 1input or if oneof the VIDEO

modes/L_thecunentinput dudng TVGuide OnScreen_=

setup),

iii i !i _z :.... I;;;; .......

iii In put Configuration ii

!!!Channel Program iii¸

Signal Meter

Press 'I or I_ to select the input source (Cable or Antenna)

for the ANT 1 input on the TV.

Note:/fa cablebox/s connectedto theANT Iinput dt/dng

TVGuideOn ScreenTMsetup,the entireTerrestda/menu will

notbe accessible,includ#Tgtheinput sourcefor ANT L which

willautomaticallydisplay"CableBox"

Press • and then 'I or I_ to select the input source (Cable

or antenna) for the ANT 2 input on the TV, if'applicable. If

)_ti have not connected anything to ANT 2, skip this step.

Antenna iiiiii

6. To save your new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to your original settings, highlight

Cancel and press ENTER.

#01E 041-043 566272HM195 41

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:27 PM

[

ProgrammingchannelsintotheTV'schannelmemory

When }q_tlpress CHANNEL • or • on the remote control or

TV control panel, your TV will stop only on the channels stored

in the TV's channel memor>

Follow the steps below to program channels into the TV's

channel memor>

Programming channels automatically

_5)tirTV can automatically detect all active channels in }_)ur area

and store them in its memor> After the channels are

programmed automatically you can manually add or erase

individual channels.

Note:

•Youmustconflguf_ theantennainput sources before

programming channels Cseepage41),

•Ifthelnputs/gnaltypelssettoCABLEforanantennainput, the

automaticchannelprogrammingprocesseraseschannelsthat

wereprevious!yp/ogrammedintotheTVtsmemo/y

• ffthe input signal type issettoANTENNA, theautomatic

channdp/ogramming processdoesNOTe/asechannelsthat

were previous!y programmed IntotheTVtsmemo/ybutadds

newly foundchannelsto theex£ting set of programmed

channels.To/emoveachannelfromthememo/_youmust

manually deleteit (,seenext page],

• TotunetheTVtoa channdnotprogrammed if7thechannel

memo/yyoumustusetheChannelNumberbuttonsonthe

remotecontrol

• Pfogrammingchannelsforanantennainputconflguredfor

CABLEwilltakesubstantial!y longer thanforanantennainput

configured forANTENIVA,ThisisnomTal; however;once

ehanndprogfamm/bg is completed, youshouldnothaveto

repeat the programming process again unlessyoulCableTV

servicelineup changes sfgnificant/y

• Ifyou haveaCableCARD_Minserted@age 12_,channd

programming forANT7isdisabledbecausetheCableCARD_

automatically loadstheCablechannellistintotheTV%ehannd

ITleFnOly

To program channels automatically:

1. Make sure }q3tlhave configured the antenna input sources.

Seepage 41 for details.

2. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

3. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of

Installation menu icons will appear on-screen).

;;;;;;S_eep Timer

HDMi 2 Audio A_{_

Slide Show Interva_ 2 See

Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Channel Program,

and press ENTER.

Highlight ANT 1 or

ANT 2, depending on

which antenna input

?_)uwant to program

channels for, and then

press ENTER to start

automatic channel

programming.

bput Oontiguration

Ohmmel Add/Delete

The TV will automatically cTcle through all the channels

for the antenna input you selected, and store all active

channels in the channel memor> While the TV is cycling

through the channels, the message "Scanning channels,

please wait" appears (as shown above).

To cancel channel programming, either press EXIT or

highlight Abort in the on-screen display and press ENTER.

When channel programming is done, press CHANNEL

• or • to view the programmed channels.

Channel

Numbers

CHANNELAT IV control panel

POWER

(ENTER)_I

CHANNEL^ v

......

#01E 041-0 3 566272HM195 42

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:27 PM [

ProgrammingchannelsintotheTV'schannelmemory(continued)

Manually adding and deleting channels in

the channel memory

After automatically programming channels into the channel

memor)q you can manually add or delete individual channels.

To add or delete channels in the channel memory:

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of

Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in

step 3).

!!! _,#iiii _,== !!!i,I,oiiili_,ilI iiiit;]<;Uiiiii:_T;i

iiiiiiOn/Off Timer

............... i

3. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Channel Add/Delete,

and then press ENTER.

iii:i:iiiiiQ{ii{i{?ii ;iii]iii;i ziiiiiil] ii

Input Configuration

Channel Ploglam

!!!Signal Motel

.The illustration below left shows channels programmed for

the ANT 1 antenna input. To view the list of channels

programmed for the ANT 2 or Cable box antenna input,

press the • • buttons to highlight either "ANT 2" or

"Cable Box" and press ENTER.

Note: "Cable Box" will appear on!y if)'ou connected a cable

boxtoyourT_

[] 2 - n_og ® 1 -AnalogOANTI

2._ - DJg_t=, 2 -_,n_,ogdA,T2

[] _._ - 0,g.=o_=0_0. : [] _ _*,n=og

3 - analog 4 - Anglo

4-an_,og 5 -an_,_,

s - An_,og 6 L a0_,o

[] 6 _*,n_,gg [] r_An_,og

8 - Analog 10 -- Analog gon_

To add a channel to the channel memory:

Highlight the unchecked box nex[ to the channel number

you want to add, and then press ENTER to check the box.

To manually add digital subchannels on a physical channel:

Use the Channel Numbers and the Dash (-/100) on the

remote control to enter the channel number (for example,

56-1).

If the channel isfound, the number will be added to the list

and the box will be checked.

If the channel is not fimnd, a message will appear.

To remove a channel from the channel memory:

Highlight the checked box next to the channel number you

want to remove, and then press ENTER to uncheck the

box.

To save your new settings:

Highlight Done and press ENTER.

To revert to your original settings:

Highlight Cancel and press ENTER before saving.

To remove all channels from the channel memory:

Highlight Reset and press ENTER, and then highlight

Done and press ENTER.

Note:

•ThL_actionapp/ies to thecu/7_ntantennainput on/y To

delete/addchannelsontheother #Tput, highlight the input

youwant(ANTIorANT2) andBessENTER

•ThLsactioncannotbecancelledunlessyouhighlight Cancel

andptessENTERbeforesaving your changes

.. _ ®

2-_ -- Digital OANT2

iiiili_ _ i-- ii Aoa_o_iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii!!!!!!iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiliii!i!iiliiiiiiii!

iiiiiiii:ii_4 L iAoa_ogiiiiii!iiiiiiiii!iiiiiiiii!iiiil;!iiiiiiiiiii!iiiii!iiii!!!ii

ii{ii:i_ 5 i-- i Diglal iiiiiiiiii:iiiiiiiiillii;iliii!i!iii!!ii

iiiiii!l _ i- i Ao=_oi!i!iililiiiiiili!iiiiiiliiiiiiliiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiliiiiii!iiii

ii111 ri-- ii AnalogiiiiiiiiiiiResetiiiiiili!!i

iiiiii! r._ i-- i D_e_ta_!!!!!!i!!c=ooe*iiiiiii

.... ...................................._'_' !!!!!!i!ii!ii!ii!ii!!! !Z!!!!!i

#01E 041-043 566272HM195 43

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:28 PM

[

Programmingyourfavoritechannels

You can program tip to 27 channels as f_worite channels into

three Favorite Channel sets (nine channels from the ANT 1

input, nine from the ANT 2 input, and nine from the Cable

box input). You can then scan through your f_worite channels

onl> skipping other channels you do not normally watch.

To add and delete channels in the Favorite Channels sets:

1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.

2. Highlight Favorite Channels and press ENTER.

3. Use the IV buttons to select either ANT 1,ANT 2, or

Cable box and press ENTER.

4. Highlight Edit and press ENTER.

.................................

To add a channel to the selected Favorite Channel set: Use the

,&V buttons to }fighlight an unchecked box next to a channel you

want m set as a l:_worite and then press ENTER to check the box.

To delete the channel from the selected Favorite Channels set:

Highlight a checked box and press ENTER to uncheck it.

Note:/fyou t/y to add more than

ninefavodtechannelsper input,an

enor messagewillappear Youwill

need to delete(uncheck] a channel

beforeyou can add another:

When done highlight Done and

press ENTER.

To program favorite channels for another input:

Either:.. Highlight ANT 1,ANT 2, or Cable Box, which

will change the f_woritechannel settings in the selected

input. (This will not change the TV's current input.)

O*:.. Press INPUT to select ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box

and then repeat steps 1-4.

"Cable Box" will appear only if you connected a cable box

to )_mrTV.

To clear your favorite channel lists:

1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.

Highlight Favorite Channels

and press ENTER.

Highlight Edit and press

ENTER.

Highlight Reset and press

ENTER.

Highlight Done and press

ENTER.

To tune your favorite channels for the current ANT input:

Press FAVCH AV.

To tune your favorite channels using the favorite channel

list:

1. Press 100 to display the favorite channel list.

2. Press the corresponding number button (1-9)

to select your desired channel.

Note: Totuneyour favo_ftechannelsfor another

input,you will needto changethe InputSelection

firsL

To quickly scan through your favorite channels in anine

picture multi-window (for the current ANT input):

Press FAV SCAN. See page 78 fi)r details.

Note:

•Totune to a channelfrom theFAVSCANmode, highlighta

windowandpressENTER

• Toscanyour favoritechannelsfor anotherinpuLyou willneedto

changethe InputSelection[i_L

__ _o_

Channel Numbers

100

_AV

FAVCH AT

FAVSCAN

#01E 044-0 2 566272HM195 44

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:30 PM [

SettingupandusingTheaterNetTM on-screendevicecontrol

The TheaterNet feature allows you to control many brands of

IEEE1394 and/or infrared remote-controlled A/V devices

through your TV using on-screen control icons and the TV's

remote control.

Note:

•Although the TheaterNeton scleendevicecontrolfeatureincludes

codesfor many devices,itmaynot includecodesfor someor allof

thefeatureson certaindevicesyou Wl_sbto conLro[ff you a/e

unableto program the TbeaterNetfeatureto operateyour device

orsome of:be featureson that device,usethedevicet__emote

controlor thecontrolson thedevice.

• ForIRpass throughdevicecontrolinfo/mat/on,see"Cont,mlling

infraredremote controlleddevicestbrougbthe TVCIRpass

tbmugbJ"onpage 27

Setting up TheaterNet

All device types except IEEE1394 require the following setup

process before you can control them using the TheaterNet on-

screen icons.

All compatible IEEE1394 devices are automatically recognized

by the TheaterNet feature and do not require setup.

Note: Seepage22 for deta/Tsaboutthe/EEE1394po/_s./fyour

IEEE/384 deviceisnot fecogf?lzedd}loL/ghtheIEEEI384 po/To1

tbmugb the TbeaterNetfeature,it maybe possibb to setit up for IR

pass tbrougbcontrolasan infmted device(seepage 21),

To set up TheaterNet device control:

1. Make sure you have properly connected your infrared

remote-controlled device(s). See page 21 for details.

2. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

3. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of

Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in

step 4).

HDMi _ Audio Aulo

AVHD Skip Time 15 Inin

4. Open the Devices menu, highlight TheaterNet Devices,

and then press ENTER.

5. The TheaterNet Setup menu opens.

Using the 'I _" buttons, select the Input the device is

connected to.

Note: Whentheinput is changed,all unsavedsettingswillbe

/osL

6. Press • and then 'I II, to select the device _'pe.

7. Press • and then 'I _" to select the device Brand.

Note: Whenselectinganew brand,theIR code willbe set to O,

8. Press • and then 'I _" to select the device's IR code.

9. If the desired IR code is found, skip to step 10.

If the desired IR code is not in the list, press • and use the

Channel Number buttons to enter the device IR code.

Note: Youcanfind the IR codefor your devicein the on

screenIL_tor in the TheatedVetdevicecode tableonpages

4_49,

10. Highlight Test and press ENTER to test whether the device

responds to the code. If the device does not respond to the

code, repeat steps 8 and 9 using another code fi)r the same

device.

When done, highlight Done and press ENTER or choose a

different Input for which to set up TheaterNet device

control

To remove a device from TheaterNet:

1. Follow steps 1-5 above.

2. Highlight Reset and press ENTER.

#01E 044-052 566272HM195 45

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:30 PM r

SettingupandusingTheaterNetTM on-screendevicecontrol(continued)

Usingthe TheaterNet control icons

1. Set up your infrared devices in TheaterNet, if'}_mhave not

already done so (see page 45).

Note: IEEE139 4 devices do not need to be set up #7

TheaterNet because they appear automatically #7 the

TheaterNet menu.

2. Press DEVICE on the remote control to display the device

control selection screen.

DEVICE

ENTER

EXIT

3. Using the liV*I _" but[ons, highlight the device you want

to control and press ENTER.

4. The input automatically changes to the input for the

selected device, and the device's control icons display on-

screen.

Highlight the icon for the fimcdon you want to control and

press ENTER.

To select the device's control icons directly:

Press CTRL.

To close the on-screen control icons:

Press EXIT.

To view another source:

Press DEVICE and select the input source )_)u want to

view.

The following are examples of the TheaterNet on-screen

control icons for various devices.

Toshiba Symbio_' AVHD Recorder control*

If you connected aToshiba ,5_m6id °AVHD Record< you

must set up the TVGuide On Screeff r'lsystem in order to use

the Symblo's full functiona/iOz See Chapter 5 for details on

setting up the TV Guide On Screen*r'lsystem, See pages 23

and 50 for further detai/s about AVHD digital t_corde/:_

#01E 044-0 2 566272HM195 46

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:31 PM F

TheaterNet '° I R device codes

Amplifiers

Brand Code

Aiwa (t4(t6

Bose 0674

Carver 0269

Curtis Matbes 0300

Denon 0160

GE (t078

Harman/Kardon (t892

JVC 0331

Left Coast (t892

Linn 0269

Luxman 0165

Magnavox (t269

Marantz (t892, 0321, (t269

NEC 0264

Nakamicbi (1321

Optimus 0395, 0300

Panasonic 0308, (1521

Parasound 0246

Philips 0892, (t269

Pioneer 0013, 0300

Polk Andio 0892, (t269

RCA (t3(t0

Realistic (t395

Sansui 0321

Shure 0264

Sony 0689, 0220

Soundesign 0078, 0211

Technics 0308, 0521

Victor (1331

Wards 0078, 0013, 0211

Yamaha 0354, 0133

Cable boxes

Brand Code

ABC 0003, 0008, 0014,

0(t07, 0011,0017

Americast (t899

Bell &Howdl 0014

Bell South 0899

Contec 0019

Director 0476

Evcrquest 0015

Gemini 0015

General Instrument 0476, 0003, 0276,

0011,081(t

GoldStar 0144

Hamlin 0009, 0020, 0273

Hita&i 0011

Hytex (t007

Jasco 0015

Jerrold 0476, 0003, 0276,

0012, (t014, 0(115,

0011,0810

Memorcx 0000

Motorola 0476, 1106, 0276,

0810

Oak 0019, 0007

Pace (t237

Panasonic 0000, 0107

Paragon 0000

Philips 0305, 0317

Pioneer 0877, (t144, 0533,

1877

Pulsar 0000

Quasar 0000

Cable boxes(cont.)

Brand Code

RadioShack 0015

Regal 0020, 0273, 0279

Rembrandt 001 I

Runco 0000

Samsung 0144

Scientific Atlanta 0877, 0008, 0017,

(t477, 1877

Signal 0015

Signature 0011

Sony 10(16

Starcom (t003, 0015

Stargate 0015

Starquest 0015

Supercable 0276

Tocom 0012

Torx 0003

Toshiba 0000

Tusa 0015

United Artists 00(t7

Zenith 0000, 0525, 0899

CD players

Brand Code

Aiwa 0157, 0124

Burmester 0420

California Audio Labs 0029, 0303

Carver 0157, 0179, 0437

Classic 1297

DKK 0000

DMX Electronics 0157

Denon 0873, 00(t3

Emerson 0305

Fisher 0174, (t179, 1325

GPX 1296

Garrard (t393, 0420

Genexxa 0032, 0305

Harman/Kardon 0157, 0173

Hita&i 0032

JVC 0072, 1294

KLH 1318, 1372, 1373

Kenwood 0681,0826, 0626,

0028, 0037, 0190

Koss 1317

Krdl 0157

LXI 0305

Lim_ 0157

MCS 0029

MTC 0420

Magnavox 0157, 0305

Marantz 0626, 0029, 0157,

0180

Miro 0000

Mission 0157

NSM 0157

Nikko 0174

Onkyo (t868, 0101

Optimus 1063, 0000, 0032,

0037, (t145, 0179,

0305, (t420, 0437,

0468

Panasonic (t029, 0303

Parasound 0420

Philips (t626, 0157

Pioneer 1063, I(t62, 0032,

(t305, 0468

Polk Audio 0157

CD players(cont.)

Brand Code

Proton 0157

QED 0157

Quasar 0029

RCA 1062, 0032, 0053,

(1179, 0305, 0468,

O764

Realistic 0179, 0180, 042(t

Rotel (1157,0420

SAE 0157

Sansui 0157, 0305

Sanyo 0179

Scott 0305

Sears 0305

Sharp 0861,0037, 0180

Sherwood 1067, 0180

Sonic Frontiers 0157

Sony (t490, 0000, 0100,

0185, 0604, 1364

Soundesign 0145

TDK 1208

Tascam 0420

Tcac 0174, 0180, 0393,

0420

Te&nics 0029, 0303

Victor 0072

Wards 0157, 0053

Yamaha 0888, 0036, 0187,

1292

Yorx 0461

Laserdisk players

Brand Code

Aiwa 0203

Carver (t(/64, (t194, 0323

Denon 0059, 0172

Disco Vision 0023

Funai 0203

Harman/Kardon 0194

Hitachi 0023

Magnavox 0194, 0217

Marantz 0064, 0194

Mitsubishi 0059

NAD 0059

Optimus 0059

Panasonic 0204

Philips 0064, 0194

Pioneer 0059, 0023

Polk Audio 0194

Quasar 0204

Realistic 0203

Samsung 0323

Sega 0023

Sony (1193,0201

To&nits 0204

Tbeta Digital 0194

Yamaha 0217

Miscellaneous audio devices

Brand Code

Aiwa 0010, 0159, 0404

Fisher 0052

[VC 0073

Jerrold 0520, 0459

Scientific Atlanta 0460

Sony 0010, 0159, 0576

Starcom 0459

#01E 044-052 566272HM195 47

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/B5, 4:31 PM

[

TheaterNef °IR device codes (continued)

Video accessory(HDTV decoder)

Brand Code

Panasonic 1120

Pioneer 1010

Princeton (tl 13, 0295

Samsung I 190

Sensory Science I 126

Sharp 1010

Receivers

Brand Code

ADC 0531

Aiwa 1089, 1405, 0121,

0158, (t189, 0405,

1388, 1641

A]co 1390

Anam 1609

Apex Digital 1257

Arcam 1120

Audiotro.ic 1189

Audiovox 1390

Bose 1229

Cambridg. Soundworks 137(t

Capetronic (t531

Carver 1089, 1189, 0042,

(t189

Casio (t195

Clarinette 0195

Compaq 1136

Curtis Matbes 0080

Daewoo 1250

Denon 1104, 1160, 0004,

136(t

Fisher (t042, 1801

Garrard 0463

Harman/Kardon 0110, (tl 89, 0891

Hewlett Packard 1181

JBL 0110, 1306

JVC (t074, 1374

KLH 139O

Kenwood 1313, 1027, 1570,

1569, 0027, 0(t42,

0186

Koss 1366

LXI 0181

Lasonic 1798

Linn 0189

Lloyd's 0195

MCS OO39

Mag*lavox 1(t89, 1189, 0189,

0195,0391, 0531

Marantz 1089, 1189, 0(t39,

(t189

Modulaire 0195

Musicmagic 1089

Nakamichi (t097

Onkyo 0135, 0842, 1298

Optimus 1023, (t042, 0080,

0181,0186, 0531,

(t670, 0738, (t801

Panasonic 1518, 0039, 0309,

(t367

Pcnney 0195

Philips 1089, 1189, 1269,

0189,0391, 1120

Pioneer 1(t23, 0014, 0080,

0150, 0244, 0531,

(t630, 1384

Polk Audio 0189

48(

#01E 044-0 2 566272HM195 48

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

Receivers(cont.)

Brand Code

Proscan 1254

Quasar 0039

RCA 1023, 1254, 0080,

0531, 1390, 1609

Realistic (tl 81,0195

Samsung 1295

Sansui ]089, 0189

Sanyo 0801, 1251

Sharp (tl 86, 1286

Sherwood 0491,0502, 1653

So.y 1058, 1258, 1158,

0158, 0474, 1367,

1558, 1658,1758

Soundesign 0670

Stereophonics 1023

Sunfire 1313

Tcac 0463

Technics 1308, 1309, 1518,

(t(t39, O3O9

Thorens 1189

Venturer ]390

Victor 0074

Wards 0014, (t080, 0158,

0189

Yamaha 0176, (tl86, 1176

Yorx 0195

Zenith 0857

Satellite receivers

Brand Code

Alpl,aStar t-/772

Chaparral 0216

Crossdigital 11(t9

DishPro I(t05, 0775

Echostar 1005, 0775

Exprcssvu 0775

GE 0566

GOI O775

General Instrument 0869

HTS O775

Hita&i 0819

HughesNetworkS)_tems 1142, 0749, 1749

JVC 0775

Magimvox (t724, 0722

Memorex 0724

Mitsubishi 0749

Motorola 0869

Next Level 0869

Panasonic 0247, 0701

Paysat 0724

Philips 1142, 0749, 0724,

1076, 0722, 1749

Proscan 0392

RCA 0392, (t566, 0855,

0143

RadioShack 0869

SKY 0856

Samsung l 1(t9

Sony 0639

Star Choice 0869

Toshiba 0749, 0790, 1052,

1053, 1054, 1285,

1286, 1287, 1289,

1749

Uniden (t724, 0722

Zenith (t856, 1856

VCRs

Brand

Admiral

Advcntura

Aiko

Aiwa

Akai

America Action

American High

Asha

Audiovox

geaumark

Bell & Howell

Broksonic

CCE

Calix

Canol]

Carver

Cineral

Citizen

Colt

Craig

Curtis Mathes

Qbernex

Daewoo

Denon

Dw_atecb

Electrohome

Electrophonic

gmercx

Emerson

Fisher

Fuji

Funai

Garrard

Go Video

GoldStar

Gradiente

HI-Q

Harley Davidson

Harman/Kardon

Harwood

Headquarter

Hitachi

HughesNetworkSystems

JVC

Jellsen

KEC

KLH

Keen

Kenwood

Kodak

LXI

Lloyd'a

Logik

MEI

MGA

MGN Technology

MTC

Magilasonic

7/28/05, 4:32 PM

Code

0048,0209

0000

0278

0037,0000

0041

0278

OO35

024(t

(t037, 0278

024(t

0104

0184,0121,0209,

0002,0479,1479

0072,0278

0037

OO35

0081

0278

0037,0278,1278

0072

0037,(t047, 024(t,

0072

0060,0035,0162,

0041,0760,1035

024(t

0045,0278,1278

0042

0000

0037

0032

0037,0184,000(t,

0121,0043,0209,

0002,(t278, 0479,

1278,1479

(t047, 0104

(t035, OO33

0000

0060,0035,0240,

0760,0807, 1035,

1060

0000

O432

0037,(t038,1237

0000

0047

0000

(t081,0038

0072

0046

0000,0042,0041

0042

(t067, 0041

0041

(t037, 0278

0072

O693

0067,(t041, 0038

(t035, OO37

0037

0000

0072

OO35

(t240, OO43

024(t

(t24(t, 0000

1278

[

TheaterNef °IR device codes (continued)

VCRs (cont.)

Brand Code

Magnavox t-/(t35,0039, (t(t81,

0000, 0149, 0563,

1781

Magnin 0240

Marantz 0035, (1081

Marta (t037

Mat_usbita 0(t35, 0162, 0454

Memorcx 0035, 0162, 0037,

0048, (t039, 0047,

0240, 0000, 0104,

0209, (t046, 0454,

0479, 1037, 1162,

1237, 1262

Minolta 0042

Mitsubishi (t067, 0043, (t8(t7

Motorola 0035, 0048

Multitecb 0000, (t072

NEC 0104, 0067, 0041,

(t038

Nikko (t037

Noblex (t24(t

Olympus 0035

Optimus 1(t62, 0162, 0037,

0048, (t104, 0432,

0454, 1048, 1162,

1262

Orion 0184, 0209, 0002,

0479, 1479

Panasonic 1062, 0035, 0162,

0225, 0454, 0616,

1(t35, 1162, 1262

Pcmley 0035, 0037, 024(t,

0042, (t038, 1035,

1237

Pcntax (t042

Philco 0035, 0209, 0479

Philips 0(t35, 0081, 0618,

1081, 1181

Pilot (t037

Pioneer (t067

Polk Audio (1081

Profitronic (t240

Proscan (t060, 0760, I(160

Protec (t072

Pulsar (t039

Quarter (t046

Quartz (t046

Quasar 0(t35, 0162, 0454,

1035, 1162

RCA 0060, 0240, 0042,

0149, 0760, 0807,

1035, 1060

RadioShack 0000, 1037

Radix 0037

Randex 0037

Realistic 0035, 0037, 0048,

0047, 0000, 0104,

0046

RcplayTV 0614, 0616

Runco 0039

STS (t042

Samsung 024(t, 0045

Sanky 0048, (t039

Sansui 0000, 0067, 0209,

004 I, 0479, 1479

Sanyo 0047, 0240, 0104,

(t046

VCRs (cont.}

Brand Code

Scott 1./184,0045, 1./121,

0043

Sears 0035, (t037, 0047,

0000, 0042, 0104,

(t046, 1237

Semp 0045

Sharp 0048, (t807, 0848

Shintom 0072

Shogun 024(t

Singer 0072

Sonic Blue 0614, (1616

Sony 0035, 0032, 0000,

0033, (t636, 1032,

1232

Sylvania 0035, 0081, 0000,

0043, 1781

Symphonic 0000

TMK 024(t

Tatung 0041

Tcac 0000, 0041

Technics (t035, 0162

Teknika 0035, 0037, 0000

Thomas 0000

Tivo 0618, 0636

Toshiba 0045, (t043, 0845

Totcvision 0037, 0240

United_ 0240

Vector 0045

Vector Research 0038

Video Concepts 0045

Videomagic 0037

Videosonic 0240

Villain 0000

Wards 0060, 0(t35, 0048,

0047, (t(t81, 0240,

0000, 0042, 0072,

(t149, 0760

White Westinghouse 0209, (t072, 1278

XR-1000 0035, 0000, 0072

Yamaha 0038

Zenith 0039, 0000, 0209,

0033, 0479, 1479

DVD players

Brand Code

Aiwa 0641

Apex Digital 1./672,(1717, 1./755,

0794, 0796, 0797,

0830, 0856, 1100

Audiologic 0736

g & K (t655, 0662

Blue Parade 0571

Broksonic 0695

DVD2000 0521

Daewoo 0784

Denon (t490, 0634

Emerson 0591

Enterprise 0591

Fisher 0670

GE (t522, 0717

GPX (}699, 0769

Go Video 0715

Gradiente 065 I

Grcenhill 0717

Harman/Kardon (t582, 0702

DVD players (cont.}

Brand Code

Hitachi 0573,1-/664

Hiteker 0672

JBL 0702

JVC 0558, 0623, 0867

KLH 0717

Kenwood 0490, 0534, 0682,

0737

Konka 0711,0719, 0720,

0721

Koss 0651

Lasonic 0798

Magnavox 0503, 0675

Malata 0782

Marantz 0539

Microsoft 0522

Mintek 0717

Mitsubishi 0521

Nesa 0717

Next Base 0826

Norcent 0872

Onkyo 0503, 0627

Oritron 0651

Panasonic 0490, 0632, 1362,

1462, 1490

Philips 0503, 0539, 0646,

O854

Pioneer 0525, 0571, 0632

Polk Audio 0539

Princeton 0674

Proscan 0522

RCA 0522, (t571,0717,

0822

Rotel 0623

Rowa 0823

Sampo 0698

Samsung (t573, 0820

Sansui 0695

San>_ 0670

Sharp 0630

Sherwood 0633

Shinsonic 0533

Sony 0533, 0864, 1533

Sylvania (t675, 0821

To&nits 0490

Te&wood 0692

Theta Digital 0571

Toshiba 0503, 0695, 1045

Tredex 0800

Urban Concepts 0503

XBox 0522

#01E 044-052 566272HM195 49

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/B5, 4:32 PM

Settingthe AVHD deviceskiptime

When you connect an external AVHD (audio/video hard drive)

device--such as the Toshiba S}_nbio Tv AVHD Recorder--to

one of the TV's IEEE 1394 ports, }a)u can use the AVHD device

skip time feature to set the number of minutes the device will

skip forward or backward when ?q_tlpress the SKIP buttons.

Note:

•ThLsTVwill workbestwiththe Toshiba,_ym6id MAVHD

Reco/derfor _ecordinghighdef#7/t/onand standarddefinition

matedalft_fn eithertunerandfor controllinglive TV(pause/rewind/

etc.).WhentheSymbio_MAVND Reco_deris connectedto the TV,

theremotecontrolkeys(Live,STOP,REW,PAUSE PLAY,etc) ate

automaticallyactivatedto allowpausingof live Tg

• Whenyou connectanAVHD (or a D VNS)device,the TVGuide

OnSc/een_r'_system/:sautemat/}:al!yconf(guredto allow_ecordingSee

page23 fordeviceconnect/bnJnfofTnation,SeeChapters5 and 7fb/

detailsaboutsetting upandusingthe TVGuideOnscteenrMsystem.

To set the AVHD device skip time:

1. Press MENU and open

the Setup menu.

2. Highlight AVHD Skip

Time and press P".

3. Press • or • to select

the AVHD skip time (1,

3, 5, or 15 minutes) and

press ENTER.

Settingthe HDMP audiomode

To set the HDMI audio mode:

1. Press MENU and open

the Setup menu.

2. Highlight HDMI 1 (or

2) Audio and press _'.

3. Press • or • to select

the HDMI audio mode

(Auto, Digital, or

Analog) and press

ENTER. (Auto is the

recommended mode). See "Connecting an HDMI or a

DVI device to the HDMI input" on page 19.

#01E 044-0 2 566272HM195 50

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

Settingthetimeanddate

Note: tfyou already setuptheTVGuideOnScreeffr'lsystem, the

timeanddateweresetautomatical_/ and you can skip this step

To set the time and date:

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of

Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in

step 3 below.)

3. Open the Time And Date menu, highlight Start Setup, and

press ENTER.

If)_u have not set tip the TV Guide On Screen_'_s)_tem, the

following screen will appear. To set the time, highlight TV

Guide On Screen"_and press ENTER. The TV Guide On

Screen _'_setup sequence will start, and the time and date will

be set automatically.

Ifyou h_wealreadyset tip theTV Guide On Screen_'_svstem or

ifyou have not set tip the dine the time and date settingscreen

will appear and you will need to manually set the time and date.

Note:

•tfyouhighlightTVGuideOnScreen _M(above]tosetthet/me

anddatethrough theTVGuideOnScreenrMsystem anda

power outage occurs,thetimeanddatewillbeupdated

automatically whenthepower is testorecL

• ffyou highlight Manual (above] tosetthet#neanddate

manually andapoweroutage occurs,youwilllosethetime

anddatesettings whenthepower Lsrestored

• ffyou manual_/set the t#ne and date and then peffoflb 71/Guide

ORScreenTMsetL_o,the manual tifne and date settliTgswill be

overridden by the TVGuide On Screen_Msettings

7/28105, 4:33 PM [

Viewingthe CableCARDTM menu

A CableCARD _"enables you to view encrypted digital channels.

See page 12 for connection and subscription information.

After the CableCARD '_'_is inserted, a CableCARD _'' option

appears in the Applications menu, with infi)rmational screens

provided by }_mr digital CableCARD _''service (see illustrations

below).

To view the CableCARD'" menu:

1. PressMENU and open the Applications menu.

2. Highlight CableCARD _'_and press _'.

3. Press • or • to select one of the side menu items and press

ENTER to display the information.

fiidifii8_aawa; 6figia_,,_D{{g5gia{_

Note: TheCab/egARD'°menu1}for#?fom_at/bna/purposes

onlyand hasno use/_adjustableoptions,

Settingthe QuickRestartTM Feature

With the Quick Restart _'_feature set to ON, the TV will stay in

Shutdown mode fi_rseveral minutes after the TV is turned off"

(see Notes below).

If the TV is turned on from Shutdown mode, the full picture

appears immediatel>

To set the Quick Restart'"featuret

1. Press MENU, and then press "_or _" until the Setup menu

appears.

2. Highlight Quick Restart and press _'.

3. Press • or • to select either On or Off:

........

.... _ulo ........................

8ia_Gv_i

Note:

If Quick Restart L_set to Offand you turn off the TV,it can take

several seconds for the picture to appear when you turn on the TV

again,

ff Quick Restart Lsset to On and you turn off the TV, the following

will occur for a few minutes:

•Thescreen (lamp] lights dim/_

• Thefans continue to run,

Thisis 8 function of the Quick Restae"Shutdown mode and is not a

TVmalfunct/on, lf you do not prefer thL%set the Ouick Resta/t

feature to Off.

When the Ouick Restart feature Lsset to Off, ff you _epeatedly turn

the TVon and off#7 asho_t period of t#ne, the useful service life of

the lamp may be shelter than the avetage useful se/vice life See

page 103

#01E 044-052 566272HM195 51

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:33 PM

Viewingthe digitalsignalmeter

55m can view the digital signal meter for ANT 1 and ANT 2

digital TV input sources only.

To view the digital signal meter:

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of

Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown in

step 3 below.)

o,_J6_Timg;

HDMi 2 Audio auia

3. Open the Terrestrial menu, highlight Signal Meter, and

press ENTER.

Channe_ Add/Delete

4. Use the IY*I _" buttons to select the antenna input and

digital channel whose signal you want to check.

Note: Thephysicaldigita/channelnumberlistedin theSignal

Mete/ screenmay not correspondto a virtualTVchannel

numbe_:Contactyou/local broadcastersto obtain theRF

channelnumbef_foryou/local d/iT/talstations,

PhysicM Digital O}_annel

Virtual DigitaJ Channel NtA

To close the screen and return to the Terrestrial menu:

Highlight Done and pressENTER.

To return to normal viewing:

Press EXIT.

Viewingthe systemstatus

To view the system status:

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Installation and press ENTER. (A new set of

Installation menu icons will appear on-screen, as shown

below right).

System Infomalion

Steep Time/

3. Open the System Status menu, highlight System

Information, and then press ENTER.

4. Use the *I _" buttons to scroll through the menu bar to

check the Product Information and Software Version.

To close the screen and return to the Installation menu:

Highlight Done and press ENTER.

To return to normal viewing:

Press EXIT.

Restore Factory Defaults

To restore all settings and channels to their factory default

values:

1. Follow steps 1-3 above.

2. Use the *I _" buttons to scroll through the menu bar to

select Factory Defaults.

3. Enter )_mrPIN code (or 0000 if no PIN code has been set).

4. Highlight Yesand press ENTER. The TV will turn off

automatically after a few seconds. After the TV turns ofl-,

unplug the TV power cord and then plug it in again to

complete the restore process.

To cancel the reset:

Highlight No and press ENTER.

#01E 044-0 2 566272HM195 52

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:35 PM [

WGuide

&teracdve program

Tile TV Guide Oil Screen _Msys[em is a free, interactive,

on-screen program guide buik in to )_mr Toshiba TV that lists

schedules and infbrmadon filr TV programs in your area.

Note: Overthe-a/;,or cable,accessto stationscanying TVGuide

On ScreenTMdataist_quif_d for the TVGuideOnScreenT_systemto

ope/ate.TVGuide OnScreenTMsystemdoesnot wot_ withsatellite

programming Toshibadoesnot providethe TVGuide OnScreenTM

data,rather;suchdatais providedby a thi/d pat_ whichis

responsibhfor itsaccuracyand availabilityAdditionally,occasional

compatibilityL_sueamayexL_tbetweenthe TVGuideOn Screen_r'

systemcontainedit}your TVand the dataprovidedby the th#dpa/_

Ifyou expedenceartypeffomTanceissueawithyou/ TVGuide

On Screen_Msystem, pleasecontact thefollowing.

•In the U.S.,callTACPConsume/Solutionsat (800] 631-3811orv/L_it

http://www.tacp.com/customersupport/contacLasp.

• In Canada,ca//TCLCustomerServiceat 1800 268-3404

Tile TV Guide On Screen _' s)_tem includes the fi)llowing features:

•Streamlined on-screen assisted setnp--Quickly and easily set

up )_mr TV Guide On Screen _"sys[em using the on-screen

prompts (see "Setting up the TV Guide On Screen _' s)_tem"

below).

• Program listings and INFO windows--Scroll through eight

days of TV listings and view progranl infi_rmation such as

rating, stereo, HDTV, new episode.

• Watch TVand display TV Guide On Screetfl" information

simultaneously.

• Channellineup enstomization--Custonlizeyourchannel

lineup so your favorite stations are listed first.

• Direct tnning--Directly tune the TV to a current program

you want to watch by selecting it in the program guide.

• Reminders--Schedule show reminders that will either display

an on-screen notification banner or automatically tune the TV

to the channel of the show fbr which )_m set the reminder.

• Recording--Easily schedule recording of one or more

programs.

Note:A VCRorIEEE/394recording deviceisrequired for recording

Itisrecommendedthatyouconnectyourdevicesaccording tothe

instructionsinChapter 2

• Search Search for showsby category, ke)_vord, or

alphabeticall>

•On-screen help--The TV Guide On Screen _''system contains

on-screen feature definitions and navigation instructions.

To open the TV Guide On Screen _" system:

•While watching TV, press

the TV GUIDE button

on the remote control;

--or--

•Press MENU, open the

Applications menu,

highlight TV Guide

On Screen _'',and press

ENTER.

Audio Playel

Picture Viewer

Note: After setting up the TV Guide On Screen _r'system, the program

guide opens automatically t_ydefault when you turn on the TV Toturn

off thL_feature, see page 40

Settingupthe TV GuideOnScreeff system

Follow these instructions to set up the TV Guide On Screen _"

s}_tem so it can receive current program data for }_mr area.

Note: Ifyou move the TVto a diffe/entZIP/postalcode,you will

need to perform the TVGuideOn Screen_MSetupproceasto

/econflgur_your TVGuide OnScreenTMsystem.

If you have not already connected your antenna, cable box,

and/or recording device, see Chapter 2 for connection

instructions.

Note: Youmustconnecta VCRor anIEEEI394 compatible

recordingdeviceto use the TVGuideOn Screenrr'_,_wtem's

one touch t_cotding featut_ It isiecommendedthatyou

connectyou/ devicesaccordingto the connectioninstructions

in Chapterz

The unauthorized recording,use, distribution, or revision of

television programs,videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is

prohibitedunder the CopyrightLaws of the United States and

other countries,and may subjectyou to civil and criminal liability.

Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

Highlight Installation and then press ENTER to open the

Installation menus. (A new set of menu icons will appear

on-screen, as shown in step 3 below.)

3. Open the TV Guide On Screen ;MSetup menu, highlight

Start, and then press ENTER.

'_5}/,,u i*_' ;<:,{

,, : iii ;: iiiiiii_>i,,ii,,i,,_ii> ,,, ,

4. Go to Chapter 5 for instructions on completing the setup.

Read this chapter for details on using the TV Guide

On Screen_'*interactive program guide.

#01E 053-056 566272HM195 53

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:35 PM [

Navigatingthe TV GuideOnScreenTM system

_V G_DE Tim

• While watching TV, press o_ s!o_ r_,,**'*'_,

the TV GUIDE button

to enter the TV Guide vi,_

On Screen _Ms}_[em. The wmoo_

LISTINGS screen will

appear with the current show

highlighted.

• When in the TV Guide

On Screen _ s)_tem, if)_m press

the TV GUIDE button from

any screen, the TV will tune to

the show displayed in the Video

Window.

• Use the arrow keys on the

remote control (••'_ _') to

highlight any show, and then

press ENTER to tune to that

show.

• Scroll left or right ('_ _') _._iA_

to view eight da?_ of listings, c_.,_,_Lo_ _mo._,,

• Press MENU to display a panel menu with options for the currently

highlighted program or tile, including setting recordings and reminders.

• To access another Service screen:

1. Press • to highlight the Service Bar.

2. Press <or _" to highlight a different Service (LISTINGS, SEARCH,

SETUP, SCHEDULE, or RECORDINGS).

3. Press • to use that Service.

Note: Helpful/bfoHrat/on about each Serwce appea_s /77the Info Box

Note:

•The TVGuide On ScreenTr'Imenus shown in this manual 8/e

for illustration purposes only 7he channels, proglaf77&and

TV Guide On ScreenTHinformation asillustrated may not be

availablein yout area Theoptions and featuresas illustrated

are subject to change when updates are downloaded from the

TV Guide On Screenmservice to your T_/

•The TVGuide On So'teenT''interactive program guide supports

cable4eady, cable box, and d(gital cable services,as wellas

over the air broadcasts/7 does norprovide listings for satellite

sef¥ioes

TV Guide On Screen TM remote control functions

BUTTON FUNCTION

TV GUIDE • Whenwatching TV,enters the TV Guide On ScreenT'_systemand highlights the current show

listing.

•When in the TV Guide OnScreen;Msystem,returns to watching TV and displaysthe show in

the Video Window. - (digital-

Numbers • Fordirect channel tuning, priority ordering, and channel editing, separatolO

- [digital separator) • Forentering digital channel numbers. MENU -

MENU • Displaysthe panel menu,in which youcan chooseoptions (for example,record, remind, INFO -

keyword).

INFO • Cycles between levels of information,as available,in a Sewice screen or other type of screen. TV GUIDE -

ENTER • Makes a selection or executes an action. ENTER

• With acurrently airing show listing highlighted, returns to watching TV and tunes to the show • I_ •

channel. •

• With afuture airing show listing highlighted,displaysa panelmenu with viewing options. PAGE UP/-

• •<1_ • Providedirectional control. DOWN

• Whenwatching TV, • and • provide surfing through channelsturned ON in the LISTINGS

screen.

PAGEUP/DOWN • When in the TV Guide OnScreen_Msystem,movesfrom one set of screen information to the _ and

next,when applicable.

REC • When in the TV Guide OnScreen_Msystemor watching TV,initiates the recording process. REC

SPLIT • When in the TV Guide OnScreeff _system,toggles between locking and unlocking the Video

Window. SPLIT

and _ •Jump forward and backward one day in the LISTINGSscreen.

Numbers

( c330c£3 1

E_o_ 0_o0_)

#OlE 053-0 6 566272HM195 54

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:36 PM F

NavigatingtheTVGuideOnScreenTM system(continued)

Video Window

• When you open the

TV Guide

Oil Screen _ system,

the current program

appears in the Video

Window.

• As }_mscroll through

the listings, the Video

Window will change >__d*__

to display the selected

program.

• The locWunlock icon indicates the status of the Video Window.

• _53t_can set the Video Window to remain on a single channel (locked) or to

change channels (unlocked) as you navigate through listings.

To lock/unlock the Video Window:

Press the SPLIT button on the remote control to toggle between locking

and unlocking the Video Window.

--OF--

Highlight a channel logo or the LISTINGS Service Bar Label and press

MENU to display the option to locWunlock the Video Window.

Info Box

Panel Menus

• A panel menu appears:

- when }_u press MENU on a highlighted tile (if additional options

are available); or

- when }_mpress ENTER on a show starting in the future.

• When a panel menu appears, the highlighted tile changes color to

indicate that the panel menu relates to the tile.

• Press INFO to display help for the current panel menu.

• Press • and • to move among the options.

• Press "_ and _" to move to adjacent options or, if the highlight is on a

odometer, to change the odometer choice.

• To move the highlight to the deflmlt command button, press ENTER

from an odometer or entry box.

• To execute [he action and close the panel menu, highlight the

command bu[mn and press ENTER.

• To cancel any changes and close the panel menu:

- press MENU; or

- highlight Cancel and press ENTER.

• Ira panel menu contains more options than can be displayed in one

panel, the word "more" appears at the bottom of the menu. To access

the additional options, either scroll down using the • button or the

PAGE UP/DOWN (CH ••) button.

#01E 053-056 566272HM195 55

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:37 PM

NavigatingtheTVGuideOnScreenTM system(continued)

Info Box

• An Info Box contains information about a show, Service, or Panel Ad, or

provides general help (for example, for a panel menu).

• An Info Box for a program in the LISTINGS screen can have up to three

sizes:Small, Large, or "No."

- Press INFO on the remote control to cycle among the sizes.

- The de£mlt Info Box size is Small. To change the default size, open the

SETUP Service screen (see page 66).

• The Info Button icon ( _il_:o )appears on the Info Action Bar if the Info

Box size can change and/or if there are additional Info screens. Press the

INFO key on the remote control to change the size and/or to display

additional Info screens.

• In some instances, the INFO button on the remote control is used to page

forward (for example, if there are additional pages of information in a Panel

Ad, a Channel Ad, or help text).

Bar

Small Info Box

_ Large Info Box

TV Guide On Screen TM Icons

ICON NAME DESCRIPTION

Info Button •Additional Info Boxinformation is available, or tim Info Box bas additional sizes.

ProgressBar •Elapsedtime in current show.

• Progressbar appears in LISTINGS and SEARCH and when the Info Button is pressed while watching TV.

_ HDTV • Show is presented in high-definition TV,if available.

Afe_ New • Show is new (not a repeat).

Stereo • Show is available in stereo.

D I o I "r A L Dolby Digital • Show is availablewith Dolby Digital 5.1audio (digital channels only).

CO • Closed captioning is available for the show.

TV Rating • TV rating for the show.

Record Once • Show is set to record once.

• Other frequencies are Daily (manual recording only), _,_1_,_'i _,_,"

Regularly,and Weekly.

RecordOff • Show is set to record but recording is currently Off (show remains in schedule).

Record • Recording is suspended due to a schedule conflict (show remains in schedule).

Suspended • Recording resumeswhen the conflict no longer exists.

RemindOnce •Showissettoremindonce. _ _ _

• Other frequencies are Daily (manual reminding only),

Regularly,and Weekly.

Remind Off • Show is set to remind but reminder is currently Off (show remains in schedule).

Remind • Reminder issuspended due to a schedule conflict (show remains in schedule).

Suspended • Reminder resumes when the conflict no longer exists.

#01E 053-0 6 566272HM195 56

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:38 PM F

TV GuideOnScreeWMServices

The TV Guide On Screen;_'_s?Ttemconsists of five main services: LISTINGS, SEARCH, RECORDINGS, SCHEDULE, and SETUE

Note:

•FortheRECORDINGSse/viceto alL,pi!!y, an IEEEI394recording devicemustbeconnectedtothetelevision(see Chapter 2); otherwise, only

fourse/vic'esdisplay Recording tootherdevice',suchasaVCR,ale possible fromwithintheLISTINGSservice.

• When using theTVGuideOnScreenTMsystem to recordaprogramfortbefirsttime,it isrecommendedthatyou peflbnnatestf_eording to

makesureyoursystemissetupproperly

•ffthepoweriscutor theplL4gbecomesdisconnectedduring timer recording, anyrecordedcontentswillbe/osLItmaytakeupto aweek

beforeanentireprogramscheduleisava#ab/e.

•ffthe TVpowercoldisunplugged foranextendedperiod of time, it maytake.upto24hour:swit/}theTVif}standby mode Cpower cold

plugged #7andpowe/OFF]todownloadtheentireTVGuideOnScreenT_programschedule..Itmaytakeuptoa weekbeforeanentire

programscheduleLsavailable.Besuretofollowtheinstructionsunder"fV GuideOnScreenTMReminder"onpage40

LISTI NGS screen

• When you open the TV Guide On Screen;_'system,

LISTINGS is ahvays the first service displayed.

• With LISTINGS highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO

to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen.

• Use the arrow keys to move the highlight within LISTINGS

to do the following:

- View eight da}_ of show listings

- Read show descriptions

•Use the Number keys on the remote control to jump to a

specific channel's listings.

• To watch a show (if on now), highlight the show and press

ENTER.

• Todisplay the Episode Options panel menu fi)r a particular

show, highlight a show and press MENU.

Episode Options panel menu

From the Episode Options panel menu you can choose to set a

recording, set a reminder, or tune to the channel. The following

are descriptions of the buttons.

GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no

information, and returns to the Service Bar.

TUNE TO CHANNEL /WATCH NOW." Exits the TV Guide

On Screen;_'_system and tunes to the channel of the highlighted

show (if the show airs in the filture) or tunes to the show (if the

show is currently airing). The button label changes according to

whether the show is currently airing or not.

SET RECORDING: Displays the Record Options panel menu,

from which you can set the show to record. For additional

information, see "SCHEDULE screen" and "Record features"

on page 61.

-Tune directly to a show currently airing

- Set a show to Remind (e.g., start time, frequentT, automatic

power ON, auto-tune TV)

- Set a show to Record (e.g, start/end time, frequency)

- Lock and unlock the Video Window

SET REMINDER: Displays the Remind Options panel menu,

from which you can set a reminder for the show. For additional

information, see "SCHEDULE screen" on page 61, and

"Remind features" on page 63.

CANCEL: Closes the menu, changes no infi)rmation, and

returns to the highlighted show.

#01E 057-062 566272HM195 57

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:38 PM F

TVGuideOnScreenTM Services(continued)

SEARCHscreen

•SEARCH allows you to find shows by ke_avord

alphabetically, or by category (HDTV, Movies, Sports,

Children, Educational, News, Vimety, Series).

• With SEARCH highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO to

display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen.

• Use the arrow keys to move the highlight within SEARCH.

Example: Category search

1. From the SEARCH screen, press • to highlight a category

(in this example, MOVIES).

2. Press • to highlight a subcategory (in this example, ALL).

3. Press ENTER to display a list of all movies, organized by

date and time.

4. Highlight a show and press ENTER to watch (if on now)

or press MENU to display the Episode Options panel

menu. (See "Episode Options panel menu" on page 57.)

#01E 057-0 2 566272HM195 58

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:38 PM [

TVGuideOnScreenTM Services(continued)

SEARCHscreen [continued)

Example: Keyword search

Ke)avord search lets you enter a word(s) to find a particular

show by category or for every show title that matches.

1. From the SEARCH screen, highlight KEYWORD, and

then press ENTER.

2. Highlight NEW SEARCH in the panel menu, and then

press ENTER.

3. The Search Options panel menu opens. Highlight

CATEGORY, and then use the arrow keys to highlight a

category to search (All, HDTV, Children, Sports, etc.).

4. After highlighting a category, press • to highlight ENTER

KEYWORD, and then press ENTER.

5. The keyhoard is displayed. Use the arrow kex_ to highlight

a character and then press ENTER to display it. When

finished entering all characters, highlight DONE and press

ENTER.

6. A list of all matching shows for that ke}avord is displayed.

7. Highlight a show and press ENTER to display all airings.

Then highlight a specific listing and press ENTER to watch

(if on now) or press MENU to display the Episode Options

panel menu. From the Episode Options menu, you can

choose to set a recording or reminder, or tune to the

channel (see "Episode Options panel menu" on page 57.)

The TV Guide On Screen_'*system stores all the ke}avords you

create.

To edit or delete akeyword:

From the SEARCH/KEYWORD screen, highlight the

ke)avord )_mwant to edit or delete, and then press MENU

to display the Search Options panel menu, with the

following options:

- GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the reeD_u, changes no

information, and returns to the Service Bar.

- EDIT SEARCH: Displays the keyboard, from which }_)u

can change the keyword.

-DELETE SEARCH: Displays the Confirmation panel

menu. Select YES to delete the search or NO to close the

panel menu.

- CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no

information, and returns to the highlighted keyword.

#01E 057-062 566272HM195 59

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:39 PM

TVGuideOnScreenTM Services(continued)

RECORDINGS screen

The RECORDINGS service screen displays a list of previously

recorded or currently recording shows on an IEEE1394

recording device connected to the TV (see Chapter 2).

Note: RECORDINGS will not appear ll7the Setvic'e Bar unless you

have an IEEE 7394 video t_cotdllTg device connected to one of the

IEEE I394 port9 on the Tt/ See Chapter2 for details.

For additional details, see "Record features" on page 67.

• With RECORDINGS highlighted in the Service Bar, press

INFO to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the

screen.

To choose the way recordings are displayed:

1. Highlight RECORDINGS on the Service Bar, and press

MENU to display the Recording Options panel menu.

2. Press IV to choose between ViewAs and Sort By, as

described below.

View As: Press "_ _" to choose between the following:

• List--Displays every recorded episode for a show (see

example in Screen B, at right).

Note:In Listview,highlightat?epLsodeto displayan lnfo

Boxwithshowll#ormation,PressMENU to displaythe

EpisodeOptionspanel menu(see "EpisodeOptions

panel menu"on page57],

• Group--Displays recorded shows without listing every

recorded episode (see example in Screen A, at right).

Note:In Groupview,highllghta show andpressENTER

to viewallteco/ded episodesPressENTERagmn to

collapsetheepisode//sL

Sort By: Press "_ and _" to choose between the following:

° Title--Displa}_ recorded shows in alphabetical order (see

example in Screen A, at right).

° Date--Displa}_ recorded shows by date and time, with

most recent first (see example in Screen B, at right).

3. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and

then press ENTER again to close the panel menu and

display the recordings with the selected options.

To view a recording, you can do one of the following:

• Highlight an episode and press ENTER to view it now. The

episode either starts from the beginning or from where it

was last stopped (if viewed previously).

• Highlight an episode and press MENU to display the

Episode Options panel menu, with the following options:

- GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no

information, and returns to the Service Bar.

- RESUME: Starts from the beginning or from where it

was last stopped (if viewed previously).

- PLAY FROM BEGINNING: Starts from the beginning,

even if stopped previousl>

- DELETE EPISODE: Deletes the episode from the

RECORDINGS list and deletes the recording from the

IEEE1394 recording device. A Confirm panel menu

displa}_. PressYES to delete the episode or NO to close

the panel menu.

- CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no

infbrmation, and returns to the highlighted show.

ScreenA

Screen B

The unauthorizedrecording,use,distribution,or revision of television

programs,videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibitedunder the

CopyrightLaws of the United States and other countries,and maysubject

youto civil and criminal liability.

#01E 057-0 2 566272HM195 60

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:39 PM F

TVGuideOnScreenTM Services(continued)

SCH EDU LE screen

The SCHEDULE service screen allows you to review, edit, or

delete Record and Remind events you set previousl}<

• With SCHEDULE highlighted in the Service Bar, press

INFO to display a help screen. Press INFO again to close

the screen.

• Highlight an event and pressMENU to display the Schedule

Options panel menu, with the following options (as applicable):

- GO TO SERVICE BAR: Closes the menu, changes no

infi_rmation, and returns to the Service Bar.

- WATCH NOW: Exits the TV Guide On Screen_'_system

and tunes to the highlighted show.

- DELETE RECORDING: Removes the recording from

the schedule. A Confirm panel menu displays. PressYES

to delete the recording or NO to close the panel menu.

- EDIT RECORDING: Opens a menu in which you can

change existing recording information.

- SET REMINDER: Opens a menu in which }xm can set a

reminder for the show (Record is not cancelled).

- CANCEL: Closes the panel menu, changes no

information, and returns to the highlighted show.

An icon identifies the event type. For more details, see "Record

features,"at right, and "Remind features" on page 63.

Record features

You can set a show to Record, or edit the record settings for a

show, in LISTINGS, SEARCH, and SCHEDULE. There are

three ways to set a show to Record, as described below.

1) Set a show to Record using the REC key on the

remote control

Press the REC key on the remote control to record the

show Once with current default settings (start and end

recording on time). Each time you press REC, }_tl change

the Record frequency (but not the default settings) among

Once (default), Regularl> Weekly, and Cancel.

Note: The_datedRecordicon appearsonthe si?owtile

eachtimeyoupressREC.See "Reco/dicon&"on page 62.

2) Set a show to Record from a panel menu

1.Highlight a show and press MENU to display the

Episode Options panel menu.

2.Highlight SET RECORDING and press ENTER to

display the Record Options panel menu.

3. Highlight the FREQUENCY field, and press '4 or _ to

choose among Once, Regularl> We&l> or Off'.

4. Highlight the START field, and press '4 or _ to choose

in the range from 120 minutes early to 120 minutes late

or On Time (default = On Time).

5.Repeat step 4 for the END field.

6. Highlight the RECORDER field and press "_ or _" to

choose the recording device.

Note:ForconnectedtEEE1394_co/dif?g devices only

7. Highlight the KEEP UNTIL field and press "_ or _ to

choose how long }x_uwant to keep the Record event.

Note:ForconnectedtEEE/394_ecording devices on/y

8. Press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE RECORDING,

and press ENTER again to close the menu.

A Record icon for the selected frequent T appears on the

show tile. See "Record icons" on page 62.

Note:Forconnected/E££1394recording devices only

Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the

menu, change no information, and return to the

highlighted show.

Note: Youcan change thedefaultvaluesof theReeoldOptions

panel menu fieldsSee"Change default options" onpage66:

#01E 057-062 566272HM195 61

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:40 PM F

TVGuideOnScreenTM Services(continued)

Record features [continued)

3} Manually set a show to Record

1.Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar, and press

MENU to display the Schedule Options panel menu.

2.Highlight NEW MANUAL RECORDING and press

ENTER to display the Record Options panel menu.

Press IY'_ _ to move through the options.

Press the Number keys or IY'_ _ to change the

information, as necessary.

3. Enter the information in the panel menu fields. You will

need to set the start and end time fbr the recording. For

details, see "Set a show to Record from a panel menu" on

the previous page.

Note: Whensetting a Manual Record#?g. the f,,_quency

opt/on "Daily" isavailableinsteadof "Regularly" See"Reco/d

icon& "below right, foradescription of Recordicons.

4. When finished entering the information in the fields,

press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE RECORDING

and press ENTER again to close the menu.

A Record icon for the selected frequency appears on the

show tile. See "Record icons," below right.

Note:Manual_eco/ding L_listed/qychannelnumber

Or highlight CANCEL and pressENTER to closethe menu

change no infimnation, and return m the highlightedshow.

When using the TV Guide On Screen_'_'system to record a programfor the

firsttime, it is recommendedthat you performa test recordingto make

sure yoursystemis set up properly.

Recording notification banner

•If the TV is not on, the recording occurs as scheduled.

• If the TV is on and }_tl are watching the channel that is set to

record, the recording occurs as scheduled.

• If the TV is on and you are watching a channel other than

the one that is set to record, a notification banner (illustrated

below) appears on-screen before recording starts. At that time

you can choose to start or cancel recording.

The delimit highlighted item in the notification banner is

"Change channel; start recording." If no change is made

within 3 minutes, the notification banner will close

automatically, the channel will change to the one set to

record, and the recording will occur as scheduled. If}_m want

to cancel the recording, select "Don't change; cancel

recording" in the notification banner and press ENTER.

Record conflict

A conflict message appears for the following reasons:

• A show set to Record overlaps with any part of another

show previously set to Record.

• A show set to Record overlaps with a show previously set to

auto-tune. (For auto-tune details, see "Remind features" on

page 63.)

Select one of these options:

• Record An}_vay--This show will override an existing show

set to Record or auto-tune.

• Don't Record This Show--Cancels the Recording.

Record icons

Following is a description of the Record icons that will appear

on the tile for a show set to Record.

• Record Once v_--Records the show one time.

• Record Regularly _,a;,_--Records the show eveUtime the

show airs on the same channel and starts at the same time.

• Record Weekly _ --Records the show every time the show

airs on the same day of the week and on the same channel,

and starts at the same time.

• Record Daily _--Records on the same channel and at the

same start time every weekday (Monday through Friday).

Note: rhL_icon d/splays for manual _eco_d/ngson/y

•Record Suspend _--Recording is Suspended due to a

schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).

• Record Off" _ --Keeps the Recording in the Schedule list

but will not record this show until the frequency is changed.

The unauthorizedrecording,use,distribution,or revisionof television

programs,videotapes, DVDs, and other materials is prohibitedunder the

CopyrightLaws of the United States and other countries,and maysubject

youto civil and criminal liability.

#01E 057-0 2 566272HM195 62

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:41 PM F

TVGuideOnScreenTM Services(continued)

Remind features

You can set a Reminder to perform the following functions:

• Automatically turn on theTV (if off) at the scheduled

reminder time, and tune the TV to the channel of the show

for which you set the reminder.

• Automatically tune the TV, at the scheduled reminder time,

to the channel of the show fbr which }_)uset the reminder.

• Display an on-screen notification banner (reminding you that

the show is about to start), from which }_tl can choose to

tune the TV to the show's channel or cancel the reminder.

_3ti can set a show reminder, or edit the reminder settings for a

show, in LISTINGS, SEARCH, and SCHEDULE. There are

two ways to set a show reminder, as described below.

13 Set a show Reminder from a panel menu

1.Highlight a show and press MENU to display the

Episode Options panel menu.

2.Highlight SET REMINDER and press ENTER to

display the Remind Options panel menu.

3. Highlight the FREQUENCY field, and press "_or lJ"to

choose among Once, Regularl> We&l> or Off"

4. Highlight the POWER ON TV field, and press "_ or lJ"

to choose either Yes (to turn oil the TV automatically, if

off, at the scheduled Reminder time) or No (delimit).

5. Highlight the AUTO TUNE TV field, and press "_ or II,

to choose either Yes (to automatically tune the TV to the

channel }x_tiare setting the Reminder for at the

scheduled Reminder time; the TV must be on at the

time) or No (default).

Note: Youcan change thedefaultvaluesof theRemind

Options panelmenufieldsSee"Change default options" on

page66fordetails.

6. Highlight the WHEN field (to set a time for displaying

the reminder screen), and press "_ or lJ"to choose in the

range from 15 mintites early to 15 minutes late or Oil

Time (default = 1 minute early).

7. Press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE REMINDER,

and press ENTER again to close the menu. A Remind

icon for the selected frequency appears on the show tile.

See "Remind icons" oil page 64.

Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the

menu, change no information, and return to the

highlighted show.

Manually set a show Reminder

1.Highlight SCHEDULE in the Service Bar, and press

MENU to display the Schedule Options panel menu.

2.Highlight NEW MANUAL REMINDER and press

ENTER to display the Remind Options panel menu.

Press AV._ II,to move through the options.

Press the Number keys or AV._ lJ"to change the

infi)rmation, as necessary.

3. Enter the information in the panel menu fields. Youwill

need to set the start and end time for the reminder. For

details, see "Set a show reminder from a panel menu,"

at left.

Note: When setting a Manual Reminder; the O_quency

option "Daily" is available instead of "Regularly" See 'Remind

icon& "on the following page,,for a descnlotion of Reminder

icons.

4. When finished entering the information in the fields,

press ENTER to highlight SCHEDULE REMINDER,

and press ENTER again to close the menu.

A Remind icon for the selected frequency appears oil the

show tile. See "Remind icons" oil the following page.

Note:Manualremff?dersarelistedt_ychannelnumbel:

Or highlight CANCEL and press ENTER to close the

menti, change no information, and return to the

highlighted show.

#01E 063-066 566272HM195 63

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:41 PM

TVGuideOnScreenTM Services(continued)

Remind features (continued)

Reminder notification banner

Based on }_mr option settings, a notification banner will appear

on-screen, if your TV is on at the scheduled Reminder time.

At that time you can either press ENTER to hide the Reminder

banner, or highlight the show and press ENTER to tune to

the show.

If no choice is made within 3 minutes, the notification banner

closes automatically and completes the highlighted item (default

is HIDE REMINDERS).

Note: Ifmore than two reminde_ areset for thesame tffne,

afTOWSappearon theRein#Talernotificationbanne/:PressAV

to highlight theshows

Remind conflict

A conflict messageappearsfor the following reasons:

• A showsetwith an auto-tune Reminder hasthe samestart

time as an existing auto-tune Reminder.

• A show set with an auto-tune Reminder overlaps with a

scheduled Recording.

Select one of these options:

• Auto-Tune An)_va)_This show will override an existing

show set to auto÷tune.

• Proceed, No Auto-Tune--Set the show as a Reminder but

do not auto-tune.

• Don't Set This Reminder--Cancels the Reminder.

Remind icons

Following is adescription of the Remind iconsthat will appear

on the tile for a show set to Remind.

• Remind Once --Displays a show reminder one time.

• Remind Regularly _ --Displays a show reminder every

time the show airs on the same channel and starts at the same

time.

• Remind Daily _ --Displays a show Reminder every

weekday (Monday through Friday) for the same channel and

start time.

Note: TI_L_icondL_p/aysformanualrein#Trierson/_

• Remind Suspend _--Reminder is Suspended due to a

schedule conflict (show remains in Schedule).

• Remind Off the Reminder in the schedule list

but will not display a reminder until you change the

frequenc)<

#01E 063-0 6 566272HM195 64

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:42 PM F

TVGuideOnScreenTM Services(continued)

SETUPscreen

After you complete the initial TV Guide On Screen_'_setup (as

described in Chapter 5), you can change the following settings:

• Change system settings

• Change channel display

• Change de_mlt options

Highlight a choice, press ENTER, and follow the on-screen

instructions.

With SETUP highlighted in the Service Bar, press INFO to

display a help screen. Press INFO again to close the screen.

Change system settings

This option appears only after you have completed the initial

TV Guide On Screen_'_setup process (as described in Chapter 5).

1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE SYSTEM

SETTINGS and press ENTER.

Change channel display

This option allows you to edit channel information that appears

in LISTINGS, including the following:

• Reorder the position the channels appear in LISTINGS.

• Change the "tune channel" number.

Note: The "tune ciTannel"L_the el}anne/on wlTic'17you receive

astation, For example, two viewers in the same 7/;ocode may

receive the same station on different channel numbet_,

depending on whether they have Cable service or are using a

cable box

• Switch a channel to one of the followingsettings:

- On (channel is alwa}_displayed in LISTINGS)

- Off (channel is never displayed in LISTINGS)

- Auto-Hide (channel is displayed in LISTINGS only

when program information is available)

1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE CHANNEL

DISPLAY and press ENTER.

2. Highlight the channel row you want to edit and press

ENTER to display the Grid Options panel menu.

3. To edit the options, press INFO and follow the on-screen

instructions.

2. Press ENTER again

to display the

Confirming Your

Settings screen.

3. Highlight one of the

options, press

ENTER, and fbllow

the on-screen

instructions.

#01E 063-066 566272HM195 65

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:43 PM

TVGuideOnScreenTM Services(continued)

SETUP screen (continued)

Change default options

This option allows ?_m to change default settings in the

following categories:

• General Defaults

• Record Defaults

• Remind Delimits

General defaults

1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT

OPTIONS and press ENTER.

2. Highlight GENERAL DEFAULTS and press MENU to

display the General defaults panel menu.

3. Enter the following information in the panel menu felds:

• BOX SIZE: The initial Infb Box size when }_)uopen the

TV Guide On Screen_'*system. Choices are No, Small

(default), Large, and Last Used.

• BOX CYCLE: The Info Box size rotation when )<_upress

INFO on the remote control when the TV Guide

On Screen_'_s)_tem is open. Choices are No Onl> Small

Onl> Large Only, No & Small, No & Large, Small &

Large, and All (delimit).

• AUTO GUIDE: Automatic entry into the TV Guide

On Screen_'*system when the TV is powered on. Choices

are On (default) and Of£

Note:SettheAUTOGUIDEtoOffif you donotwantthe

TVGuideOnSc/een_Msystem too,oef7eve[ytimeyouturn

onthe T_

4. When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and

press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the

changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with no

changes).

Record defaults

1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT

OPTIONS and press ENTER.

2. Highlight RECORD DEFAULTS and press MENU to

display the Record Defaults panel menu.

Enter the required information in the panel menu fields

(start time, end time, recorder choice, how long to keep a

Record event, the qualio _of the recording). See "Record

features" on page 61 for details on entering values in these

fields.

When finished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and

press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the

changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with

no changes).

Remind defaults

1. From the SETUP screen, highlight CHANGE DEFAULT

OPTIONS and press ENTER.

2. Highlight REMIND DEFAULTS and press MENU to

display the Remind Defaults panel menu.

3. Enter the required information in the panel menu fields

(power On TV, auto-June, when to display the Remind

screen). See "Remind features" on page 63 for details on

entering values in these fields.

4. When fnished, press ENTER to highlight DONE, and

press ENTER again to close the menu and accept the

changes (or highlight CANCEL to close the menu with

no changes).

#01E 063-0 6 566272HM195 66

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:43 PM F

Selectingthevideoinputsourcetoview

To select the video input source to view:

1. Press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the

TV control panel.

2. Press 0-8 to select the input source ?_u want to view, which

will depend on the input terminals you used to connect

?qmr devices (see Chapter 2).

The current signal source displa?_ in the top right corner of

the Input Selection screen.

@ Video 2

0 Video 3

ColorStream HD1

ColorStream HD2

HDMI1

@ HDMI 2

ANT 2

_/_ to Select

Note:

•When the Input Selection screen is open, you also can use the &T

buttons on the remote control COlthe Channd A v buttons on the

control panelJ to change the inpu_

• Youcan _epeated/ypress the INPUTbutton on the remote control

or the TV/VI DEO button on the TV contro/ pane/ to change the

lnpuL

•Toselectan/EEE1394inputsource, presstheTheatedVetDEVICE

button on the t_mote control Cseepage 26 and 45j.

• ffan IEEE1394 device is the cu/rent input, it will appear at the

bottom of the Input Sdect/on list, however; it will not dL_playin the

l/st ff you change the input source.

• Youcan/abe,/the video input sources according to the specific

devices you have connected to the TV Csee"Labeling the video

input sources" on the next pagej,

• Thesource can be "hiddefT."See page 68 for details.

-- Numbers

-- INPUT

C_ .......

Remote control

TV control panel

POWER

#01E 067@78 566272HM195 67

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:44 PM

Labelingthevideoinputsources

You can label each video input source according to the type of

device you connected to each source, from the fi)llowing preset

list of labds:

-- (defllu/t label)

Hide (to hide an unused input in the Input Selection

window)

Audio Receiver

VCR

Video Recorder

Laser Disk

Compact Disc

DVD

DTV

Satellite/DSS

Cable

Game Console

Note:

•Ifyou ,setupdevicesin TheaterNeLTMthe associatedinputsare

automaticallylabeledand cannotbe re/abe/eduntil you remove the

deviceflora Theate/1Vet(seepage 45),

•ffyou set up a cablebox in VIDEO1,thatinput willbe labeled

automaticallyand cannotbe relabe/eduntil youremove thedevice

from the TVGuideOn ScreenTMsetup,

• YoucannotselectlEEE7394devicesthmughthelnputSe/ect/on

window, however;you canselectand controlIEEE7394 devices

through Theate_Net(,seepage45].

To label the video input sources:

1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.

2. Highlight Input Labeling and )tess ENTER.

3. Press • or • to highlight the video source )_)tiwant to

label.

: l> ((}

Oo]orStmam HD 2 Hide ............

HDMI1 DTV

HDMI2 SaioiJit#)D&S

AN@_ _i

Press "_ or D"to select the desired label for that input source.

Ira particular input is not used, }<_ucan select "Hide" as

the label, which will cause that input to be "grayed out" in

the input list and skipped over when }_tl press the INPUT

button on the remote control.

Note: ff you select "H/de" for all of the #Tputlabels, the POP

feature w#l be &sabled ff you then attempt to access the POP

feature, the message "NOTAVAILABLE" w/fl appear on screen

To save the new input labels, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory default labels, highlight

Reset and press ENTER.

Input labeling example:

The screen below left shows the delimit Input Selection screen

(with none of the inputs labeled). The screen below right is an

example of how )_)u could label the inputs if you had connected

a DVD player to VIDEO 1, Cable TV to VIDE([) 2, an audio

receiver to VIDEO 3, avideo recorder to ColorStream HD1, a

DTV set-top box to HDMI 1, and a satellite/DSS set-top box to

HDMI 2. Also note that the ColorStream HD2 input is labeled

"Hidden," which means that the input will be skipped over

when INPUT or TV/VIDEO is pressed.

@ Video 2

Video 3

CdorStream ND1

CdorStream HD2

HDM[ 1

@ HDM[ 2

ANT 2

_-_ ]@toSel ct

@ Cable

Audio Receivel

Video Receivel

Colu Stein*it HI}2 Hidd¢>n)

0DTV

Sat ellite/DSS

ANT 2

0 - 0 /_ to S_lect

InputSelectionscreen

with no inputslabeled

Input Selection screen with

all inputslabeled except input 5,

which has been hidden.

To clear the input labels:

1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.

2. Highlight Input Labeling and press ENTER.

3. Highlight Reset and press ENTER.

Note: Ifyou set up adevicein TheaterNe_its inputlabelwill

notbe clearedunlessyou r_rnovethe devicefrom Theate/1Vet

(seepage45),

#OlE 067-0 8 566272HM195 68

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:44 PM [

Tuningchannels

Usingthe Channel BrowserM

The Channel Browser stores the most recently viewed channels (up to 32) in the channel histor): This feature allows you to:

• Keep a separate, temporary* history of the last 32 channels tuned from each of three inputs: ANT 1,ANT 2, and Cable Box.

*Note: Turning off the TV will clear the channel histo/y for all three inputs.

• Quickly surf and tune )_)urrecently viewed channels from the Channel Browser banner (illustrated below).

• Surf via Browse mode (to immediately tune channels as you highlight them in the Channel Browser banner) or Select mode (to surf

over channels in the browser banner before )_)u select one to tune).

• Set a "HOME" channel fi)r the ANT 1,ANT 2, and Cable Box inputs.

To open the Channel Browser banner: Press "_ (_),BACK_, (_),NEXTor ENTER on the remote control.

BACK

-Press 'I (_) to surf back from the most recently viewed channel through the last 32 channels that were tuned from the current

input, which are automatically stored in the channel history for the current input (ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box only).

- Press _" (_) to surf forward from the previous channels in the channel history tip to the most recently viewed channel.

Elements of the Channel Browser banner

Active channel

status

(Displaysinthisarea

onlyif available.)

Highlighted channel

(Displayswitha yellow

backgroundinSelectmode.

Displayswitha yellow

outlil;einBrowsemode.)

I Channels stored

in the channel

history

Active channel I Home channel instructions

(InBrowsemode,becausethehighlighted [Press• (_) or _. (_)

channelistunedautomatically,theactive I tosurftheotherchannels

channelandthehighlightedchannel in hechannelhisory,]

w a waysbethesame.

Current mode

SeectorBrowse

Current

antenna type

(cableorTV)

Active

channel

number

Channel call

letters

(ifavailable)

Resolution I Home channel I

To toggle between Browse mode and Select mode:

After opening the Channel Browser banner, press •or • to toggle between Browse mode and Select mode. The "Current mode"

field on the Channel Browser banner will flash green. Note: TheCT}anne/Browserbanneropens117Bro_eemodeby defau/L

To tune to a channel in Browse mode:

BAC_I*(_)

1. While watching TV, press 'I (_) or to open the

Channel Browser banner and surf back to a previous channel

or forward to the next channel in the channel history.

In Browse mode, when you stop on a channel number in

the browser banner, it will be highlighted with a yellow

outline and the TV will automatically tune to the channel.

2. Press EXIT to close the Channel Browser banner.

To tune to achannel in Select mode:

1. While watching TV, press"_ (_) or I_(_) to open the

Channel Browser banner and surf back to a previous channel

or forward to the next channel in the channel history.

In Select mode, when you stop on a channel number in

the browser banner, it will be highlighted with aye//ow

backg*vundbut the TV will not automatically tune to the

channel.

2. Press ENTER to tune the TV to the highlighted channel.

3. Press EXIT to close the Channel Browser banner.

In Browse mode, the highlighted ehannd numbe/ is outlined

in yellow and the channd will be tuned to automat/cal!F

Note, The Channel Browser banner will close automatically if

you do not make aselection within 60 seconds,

in Select mode, the h/_qhl/_Thtedchannel number has a

yellow background. P/ess ENTER to tune to the channel

#01E 067-078 566272HM195 69

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:45 PM [

Tuningchannels(continued)

Usingthe Channel BrowserTM {continued)

Adding and clearing channels in the

channel history

Adding channels to the channel history

The Channel Browser automatically creates a history of the

last 32 channels that were tuned in the current input (ANT 1,

ANT 2, and Cable Box inputs only). A separate history will be

stored f_)r each of these inputs,

If)_m change the input )_)t*are viewing:

a) )_m will begin a channel history for that input if one did

not exist; or

b) )_)u will return to the existing channel history for that input

if one had already been started.

The Channel Browser will store the f_)llowingchannels:

• All channels that are tuned using the numeric buttons on the

remote control.

• All channels that are tuned for at least 7 seconds using the

CH A• buttons or the FAV CH • • buttons on the remote

control.

Note:

•TheCbanne/Browserbannerwi//notappearwbentbePOPdoub/e

windowisopen;however;channelstunedwhilethePOPdouble

windowisopenwillbeaddedto theCbanndBrowserhLsto/y forthe

cuff_nt input,

• TheCbanndBrowserbannerwil/notappearintbeFAVSCAN

(favorite scan) multi windo_z Channels that appear in the FAV SCAN

multi window will not be added to the Channd Browse/h/sto/z:

howeve/; the cbannd last selected from the multi window will be

added to the channd histo/y

Clearing channels from the channel history

• Turning off the TV will clear all three channel histories

(ANT 1, ANT 2, and Cable Box).

• Removing the CableCARD'* will clear the channel history

for the ANT 1 input.

• Reconfiguring the ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable Box input

will clear the channel history for the newly configured

input(s).

NotetSeepage41fordetailsof?configuring theantennainputs

Setting a channel as the "Home" channel

for an input

To set a channel as Home using the remote control:

1. Tune the TV to the channel you would like to set as the

Home channel for the current antenna input.

2. Press and hold the HOME (1_) button on the remote

control for 3 seconds. When the Home channel is saved,

the Channel Browser banner will appear at the bottom of

the screen with the home icon flashing green.

Note: Youcansetadif&rentHomechannelforeachinput

CANT7,ANT2,andCableBoxinputson/yj,

To set a channel as Home using the menus:

1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.

2. Highlight Home CH Setup and press ENTER. The Home

CH Setup window will displa>

To tune to the Home channel:

While an input that has a set

Home channel is active, press the

HOME ('_) button on the

remote control.

Note: If youpressthe HOME

button whileaninput other than

anantennaor CableBoxinput/s

selected,the TVwill tune to the

mostrecent!ytunedHome

channd and/npuL

#01E 06%0 8 566272HM195 70

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:45 PM [

Tuningchannels(continued)

Tuningyour favorite channels

To tune to tile channels you progranmled as Faw)rite Channels,

see page 44.

Tuningto the next programmed channel

To tune to the next programmed channel:

Press CHANNEL • • on the remote control or TV control

panel.

Note:

•ThLsfeaturewinnot wo_kunlessyouprogramcbanne/sintothe

TVtschanndmemo/y(,seepage 42).

•ffyouare _ecoldinga digital cbanne/, youwillon!y beableto

change analog channelswbilethefeco/ding Ls#7progressIf you

are recordingan analog channel, youwillonly beabletochange

digital cbannelswb//etherecording Ls#7progressThis/Ls

becausetheTVtune/thatLsbeing recorded (digitalor analog]

willbelockedonthechanndthatLscurrently mcotd/ng

Tuningto a specific channel

(programmed or unprogrammed)

Tuning analog channels:

Press the Channel Number buttons (0-9) oil the remote

control. For example, to select channel 125, press 1, 2, 5.

Tuning digital channels:

Press the Channel Number buttons (0-9) oil the remote

control, followed by the - (dash) button and then the sub-

channel number. For example, to select digital channel 125-1,

press 1, 2, 5,-, 1.

Note: if adigital channel is not programmed alther tbrougb

the automatic" channel scan (page 42) or the channd add/

delete function (page 43] you will have to tune the RF

channel using the Channel Number and Dash buttons on the

temote control

Switching between two channels using

Channel Return

Tile Channel Return feature allows }_u to switch between two

channels without entering an actual channel number each time.

1. Select the first channel you want to view.

2. Select a second channel using tile Channel Number buttons

(and the dash (-) button if selecting a digital channel).

3. Press CH RTN on the remote control. The previous

channel will displa> Each time you press CH RTN, the TV

will switch back and forth between the last two channels

that were selected.

Note:

•ifyou pressCH RTNfrom a non antennainput, the TVwill

_etumtothe/asbviewedANTinput and cbanneZ

• ffyou arecurrentlyrecordingaprogram,thisfeature willnot

beavailable.

Switching betweentwochannelsusing

SurfLocW"

The SurfLockTMfeature temporarily "memorizes" one channel

in the CH RTN button, so you can return to that channel

quickly from any other channel by pressing CH RTN. To

memorize a channel in the CH RTN button:

1. Select the channel you want to program into the CH RTN

buttoll.

2. Press and hold CH RTN for about 2 seconds until the

message "Channel Memorized" appears on the screen. The

channel has been programmed into the CH RTN button.

3. You can then change channels repeatedl> and when you

press CH RTN, the memorized channel will be selected.

The TV will return to the memorized channel one time only.

Once ?_m press CH RTN and then change channels again, the

CH RTN memory will be cleared and the button will function

as Channel Return, by switching back and fbrth between the last

two channels that were selected.

®®®

o®®"

G_GG

i ..........

CHRTN

-- ChannelNumbers

-(dash)

CHANNELIT

#01E 067-078 566272HM195 71

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:45 PM r

Selectingthepicturesize

You can view many program f_rmats in a variety of picture

sizes--Natural, TheaterWide 1,TheaterWide 2, TheaterWide 3,

and Full--as described below and on the next page.

The way the image displays in any of the picture sizes will vary

depending on the f_rmat of the program )_ti are viewing. Select

the picture size that displays the current program the way that

looks best to you.

Your picture size preferences can be saved for each input on your

TV.

Numbers

PICSIZE

To select the picture size:

1. Press PIC SIZE on the remote control.

2. While the Picture Size menu is on-screen, press the

corresponding number button (0-4) to select the desired

)lcture size.

Natural

@ TheaterWide 1

@ TheaterWide 2

TheaterWide 3

I÷ Ful

Q 0 /_ to Sektct

Note:

•Youa/so can repeated/ypress P/C SIZE to select the desned

p/ctu/e size (or press the &T buttons on the remote control

while, the Picture Size screen is open].

•"Full"may not be available for some program formats (it will

be "grayed cut"in the Picture Size screen

Note:

Youa/so can select the pic'tum size using the

menu ,!ystem, Select Picture Size in the Video/

Theater Settings menu Select the input for

wbicb you want to save your picture sett/ngs. To

save your settings, h/gb/iwbt Done and press

ENTER

Cinema Mode

Auto Aspect Ratio On

Reset

Natural picture size

•The image is displayed close to its originally formatted

proportion. Some program formats will display with

sidebars and/or bars at the top and bottom.

Natural picture size example: The way the image displays will

vary depending on the fi)rmat of the program )_m are currently

watching.

Conventionalpicture on a

conventionalTV screen Conventionalpicture in Naturalsize on

your wide-screen TV

#01E 067-0 8 566272HM195 72

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:46 PM [

Selectingthe picturesize(continued)

• The center of the picture remains close to its

original proportion, but the left and right

edges are stretched wider to fill the screen.

TheaterWide 1picture size (For 4:3 format program) Note:

•tfyou select one of the TheaterWide _picture

m>es,the top and bottom edges of the

picture Onclud/ng subtitleB or captions9 may

be hidden, To view the hidden edges, either

scroll the pic,ture (Theate/Wide 2and 3 on!yj

or try viewing the program #7Full or Natural

picture m2e

• When selecting the picture sl2e, the way

the image displays will vary depending on

the format of the program you are

currently watching.

TheaterWide1picture size example

TheaterWide 2 picture size (for letter box programs)

• The picture is stretched wider to fill the width

of the screen, but only slightly stretched taller. (._ Q_ Q._

• The top and bottom edges of the picture are (_ @ Q)

hidden. To view the hidden areas, see

"Scrolling the TheaterWide ®picture" on page

74.

Using these functions to change the

picture size (i.e.,changing the height/

width ratio) for any purpose other than

your private viewing may be prohibited

under the Copyright Laws of the United

States and other countries, and may

subject you to civil and criminal liability.

TheaterWide2 picture sizeexample

TheaterWide 3 picture size (for letter box programs with subtitles)

• The picture is stretched wider to fill the width

of the screen, but only slightly stretched taller.

• The top and bottom edges are hidden. To view

the hidden areas (such as subtitles or captions),

see "Scrolling the TheaterWide ®picture" on

page 74. C> C3

C) (_D

I ABC[)EFG .................... •

TheaterWide3 picture size example

Full picture size (for 16:9 [480i, 480p] source programs only)

• If receiving a squeezed 4:3 format program, the I

picture is stretched wider to fill the width of 0 0 0

the screen, but not stretched taller.

• None of the picture is hidden. 0 0 0

#OlE 067-078 566272HM195 73

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

Full picturesizeexample

7/28105, 4:46 PM

Scrollingthe TheaterWide picture

(TheaterWide2 and3 only)

You can set separate scroll settings for the TheaterWide 2 and

TheaterWide 3 modes fbr each input.

To set the scroll settings:

1. Press INPUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the

TV to select the input for which you want to set the picture

size and scroll settings.

2. Press MENU and open the Video menu.

3. Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER.

4. In the Picture Size field, select either TheaterWide 2 or

TheaterWide 3 (you cannot scroll in any other mode).

5. Press • to highlight the Picture Scroll field.

6. Press 'I or 1_to scroll the picture up and down as needed,

from-10 to +20.

_i_;; gaa!iiiililiiii_ii

iiiiiiio,..... o0e

iiiiiii Auto Aspect Ratio

iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiReset

To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

Usingthe autoaspectratiofeature

When the auto aspect ratio feature is set to On, the picture size

is automatically selected when one of the following input

sources is received:

•A 480i signal from the VIDE() 1,VIDE() 2, VIDEO 3,

ColorStream HDq or ColorStream HD-2 input.

• A 1080i, 480i, 480p, or 720p signal from the HDMI input.

AS-oct rat o Automatic aspect size

oi signal source (automatically selected

El I when Auto Aspect is On)

4:3 normal Natural (with sidebars)

/4:3letter box TheaterWide 2

16:9 full Full

Not defined

(no ID-1 data or User-selected picture size

HDMI aspect data) (see pages 72-73)

Note:

•Theauto aspect ratio featu/e/_ not applicable to antenna or (2able input

soufr,'es

• Theauto aspect ratio feature i:_not availab/e when the POP doub/e-

window I_ open, the Freeze mode is active, or the TV Guide On ScreenTM

system i_ open

To turn on the auto aspect ratio feature:

1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.

2. Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER.

3. In the Auto Aspect Ratio field, select On.

Reset Done

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

To turn off the auto aspect ratio feature:

Select Offin step 3 above.

#01E 067-0 8 566272HM195 74

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:47 PM [

Selectingthe cinemamode

C480isignalsonly)

When }_mview a DVD (480i signal; 3:2 pulldown processed)

from a DVD player connected to the VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2,

ColorStream HD 1/HD2 (component video), or HDMI inputs

on the TV, smoother motion can be obtained by setting the

Cinema Mode to Film.

To set the Cinema Mode to Film:

1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.

2. Highlight Theater Settings and press ENTER.

3. In the Cinema Mode field, select Film.

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the _ctorv defaults highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

To set the Cinema Mode to Video:

Select Video in step 3 above.

Selectingthe lamp mode

You can select either the High Bright or Low Power lamp mode.

• The High Bright mode is useful when additional picture

brightness is desired (such as in a bright room).

• The Low Power mode redtices wear on the projection lamp.

Using this mode should result in longer lamp life.

See "Lamp unit replacement" on page 103-105.

To select the lamp mode:

1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.

2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.

3. In the Lamp Mode field, select High Bright or Low Power,

whichever you prefer.

Dynamic Contrast On

MPEG Noise Reduction Low

CableClear Auto

ColorTernperature Cool

Reset Done

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

Note:

If you set the lamp mode to Low Power; each time you turn on the TV,the

lamp will stair out in High Bdght mode but will switch to Low Power mode

if?approximately I minute. You wi// notice a change if?screen bdghtness

when thL9happens Thisis normal and L9not a sign of maltunction,

#01E 067-078 566272HM195 75

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:47 PM

Usingthe POPfeatures

Usingthe POP double-window feature

The POP (picture-out-picture) double-window feature splits the screen into two

windows so }_mcan watch two programs at the same time.

To display a program in the POP window:

1. Select the program }_tl want to watch in the main window.

2. Press SPLIT to open the POP double-window.

POP double-window

I I

Main window -- -" _k f _',_ _, POP window

T1 /V_£ e_ 1 POP

Green border

(denotes active window)

3. Press_" to highlight the POP (right) window. When highlighted, the window

will have a green border.

4. Press INPUT to open the POP Input Selection window. Select the input source

for the POP window by pressing the corresponding Number button (0-8). The

current source displa}_ in purple in the POP Input Selection window.

Video 2

@ Video 3

O ColorSteram HD1

ColorSteram HD2

HDMI1

@ HDMI 2

O ANT 2

_/_ to Select

To close the POP window and tune to the highlighted window:

Press ENTER after highlighting the window 5_)uwant to view as a normal picture.

To close the POP window:

Press SPLIT or EXIT.

Notes about recordieg:

•If the POP window is open and you attempt to start_recording the POP window w///c/ose and

ieco_ding will stair

• ffyou use the TV's remote cont/ol to stair recording, you will not be able to open the POP window

and the message "Not Available" will appear on screen,

• It isrecommended tbatyou use the TV_ ternote control to start recotding Ifyou use a device other

than the TV:_remote control to start/_cofding, you may be able to open the POP window dudng

the feco/dffig process ff tb/:_happens, the recotded audio will reflect the audio of the active window

(main or POP), wbich may not be the audio you intended to record

Note:

•When tbema#7 w/ndowL_#7 tbeANT1 orANT2

mode, the ANT1 and ANT2 inputs cannot be

selected for the POP window,

•W/Tenthe malb wlndowl_/13 Video 1/2/3,

ColorS_ream HD I/HD2, HDM1 l, or HDMI 2

mode, those inputs cannot be selected for the POP

window,

• Youcannot view IEEE1394 source programs in the

POP window

• Youcannot view two video or two antenna sources

/n both the main and POP windows simu/taneous!_

(You can view a video source #7one window and

an antenna source in the other:)

• TheFREEZE feature i:_not avaLlab/ewhen the POP

double window I_ open, If you press FREEZE

when the double wIncJowLsopen, the message

"Not available" will appear

SLOW SKIP

Numbers

INPUT

ENTER

,SPLIT

#01E 067-0 8 566272HM195 76

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:47 PM F

UsingthePOPfeatures(continued)

Switching the speaker audio (main or POP)

While the POP window is open, press 'I or I_ to switch the sound (main or POP) that

is output from the TV speakers (and from the VARIABLE AUDIO OUT terminals).

The window with the active sound is outlined with a green border.

Example: Press• Example: Press1_

POP double-window aspect ratio

The POP double<vindow feature displays each picture according to its input signal

aspect ratio, as illustrated in the examples below.

48Oi 48Oi

@@@

@®®

®®®

®® ®

d®®

Note:

•Theauto aspectratio feature (page 74) does not

operate/n POP double-window mode.

• Aspect ratio is the mt/o of width to height of the

picttyte,

#01E 067@78 566272HM195 77

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:47 PM

Usingthe FREEZEfeature

1. When viewing the TV, press FREEZE to make the picture a still picture.

2. % return to the moving picture, either press FREEZE again, press EXIT, or press

any other button.

Note:

•TheFREEZEfeatureis notavailablewhenthe POPdouble windowof FAV,%'AN

multi windowis open,ffyou pressFREEZEwheneitherwindowisopen,the message

"Notavailable"willappear

• ffthe TVisleft/n FREEZEmode, after 15minute,9it willautomaticallyreleasethe

FREEZEmode andr_tllrr7to the movingpicture.

Using the FREEZEfunction for any

purpose otherthan your private viewing

may be prohibited under the Copyright

Laws of the United States and other

countries, and maysubject you to civil

and criminal liability.

Moving picture Still picture

Usingthefavorite channelscanfeature

_ti can use this feature to quickly scan and tune the channels you programmed as

law,rite channels from a nine-picture multi-window.

Note: Tousethefavoriteel?anne/scanfeatu£ you mustfirstprog/am channelsinto the

favoriteehannd mefr}o/y ,See"Programmingyour favoritechannel,7'on page44

To scan and tune your favorite channels:

1. PressFAVSCAN. The TV will display the channels ),_u programmed as favorite

channels for the current ANT input in a nine-picture multi-window.

(To display the channels )_)u programmed as favorite channels for the other input,

)_)u must change antenna inputs first(page 67), and then press FAVSCAN.)

CABLE 18 _ al 9 _s6

@®@

sv0_ REO

®(_ mDm)

2. Highlight the window for the channel }_u want to view:

•Eibef... press the channel's multi-window position number (1-9, as illustrated

above, and not the actual channel number) to highlight the window;

•0r... use the •V 4_" buttons to highlight the window.

The highlighted window will display as a moving picture.

3. PressENTER m tune the TV to the highlighted channel and close the multi-window.

#01E 067-0 8 566272HM195 78

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:48 PM

m4 1_

- ENTER

- EXIT

-FREEZE

-FAVSCAN

Adjustingthepicture

Selecting the picture mode

You can select your desired picture settings fron_ four picture

modes, as described below.

Adjusting the picture quality

_)u can adjust the picture quality (contrast, brightness, color,

tint, and sharpness) to your personal preferences.

To select the picture mode:

Press PIC MODE on the remote control.

The following popup menu appears on-

screen.

Repeatedly press PIC MODE to cycle

among the modes. Or use "_ or P" to PIg

select the modes. MODE-

_c.d_ c_Dc_3

To select the picture mode using the menu system:

1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.

2. Highlight Picture Settings and press ENTER.

3. In the Mode field, select the mode you prefer.

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

Note:

•Thepicture modeyouselectedisforthecuff_ntinput

selectiononly (ANT 1#7theexample above], Youcanselect

adifferentpicture modeforeachinput select/bn.

• ffyou selectoneofthefacto/y set picture modes (S_eotts,

Standard, or Movie] andthenchange a pfctuf_ quality setting

(for example, increasethecontrastor change thecob/

tempe/atute], the picture mode automatically changes to

P/efet_nceinthePictureSettings rnenLz

contrast lower higher

brightness darker lighter

color paler deeper

tint reddish greenish

sharpness softer sharper

To adjust the picture quality:

1. Press MENU and open the Vide() menu.

2. Highlight Picture Settings and press ENTER.

3. Press • or • to select the picture quality you want to adjust

(Contrast, Brightness, Color, Tint, or Sharpness), and then

•'I and D"to adjust the setting, as described in the table

above.

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

The picture qualities you adjusted are automatically saved in the

Preference mode (see "Selecting the picture mode," above left).

#01E 079-086 566272HM195 79

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:49 PM [

Adjustingthepicture(continued)

Using CableClear /DNR (digital noise

reduction)

The CableClear c_digital noise reduction feature allows }_m to

reduce visible interference in }_mr TV picture. This may be

useful when receiving a broadcast with a weak signal (especially

a Cable channel) or playing a noisy video cassette or disc. This

feature is enabled f_r 480i signals ()ill>

Note: TheCab/eC/earDNR featuredoesnot function#7

Co/orStfeam,HDMI (DVI),ATSC IEEE1394,anddsgital(;able

modes.

To select CableClear/DNR preferences:

1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.

2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.

3. In the CableClear/DNR field select your desired setting.

Note:

•/fthe curfent/oputL_Antenna, Video L Video 2, or Video 3,

the menu will dssp/aythe text CableCleaf: Theavailable

selections ate Off, Low, Middle, I-tigb, and Auto.

•Iftbecu/TentinputL_Co/orStfeamHDL Co/o/Stf_afnHD2or

HDMt and the video resolution L_480/, the menu will display

the text "DNR" Theavailable sebctsons ase Off, Low, Middle,

High, and Auto. Auto will react propottlenally to the stf_ngtb

of tbe noise. Low, Middle, and High will reduce the noise #7

varying degrees from lowest to hsghest, respectsve!_

•ffthecu/7_ntinputl_Co/olStf_amHDL Co/o/Stf_amHD2, or

FIDMI, and the video f_so/ut/on is not 480si the menu will

dL_playthe text "DNR'.

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

Selecting the color temperature

You can change the quality of the picture by selecting from three

preset color temperatures (cool, medium, and warm), as

described below.

To select the color temperature:

1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.

2. Highlight Advanced Picture Settings and press ENTER.

ili _ !!!iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiid_ '_ iii! _._ iiii _;_._ ;;;;#_i ;;

3. In the Color Temperature field, select the mode you prefer

(Cool, Medium, or Warm).

MPEG Noise Reduction/ Low

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

Note:

Ifyou selectone of thef_cto_yset p/oturemodesCSports,

Standasd,or Movie_andthen changethecolor temperature

mode,thep/oturemode automatscallychangesto Preference#7

thePictureSettlngls menu.

#01E 079-0 6 566272HM195 80

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:50 PM [

Adjustingthepicture(continued)

Using MPEG noise reduction

The MPEG noise reduction feature allows }_tl to reduce visible

interference caused by MPEG compression. Choices for MPEG

noise reduction are High, Medium, Low and Off" Off"is

automatically selected when this feature is disabled ("grayed

Otlt_),

To select the MPEG noise reduction level:

1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.

2. Highlight Adwmced Picture Settings and press ENTER.

3. In the MPEG Noise Reduction field, select either High,

Medium, Low, or Off"

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the f_ctorv defaults highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

Using dynamic contrast

When dynamic contrast is set to "On," the TV will detect

changes in the picture quality that affect the appearance of your

contrast settings and then automatically adjust the video.

When dynamic contrast is set to "OfI]" the settings selected in

the Contrast field in Picture Settings will be used.

To select dynamic contrast preferences:

1. Press MENU and open the Video menu.

2. Highlight Adwmced Picture Settings and press ENTER.

:, ); _

_ !!!!_ t'_ ¸ _.Z dii _ i!_

_ _ _ _ #* _ _,_,. >i _ _

3. In the Dynamic Contrast field, select either On or Off"

MPEG Noise ReductJon

!!!!! Lamp Mode LOWPower iiiii;i

iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiil¸¸ Reset iiiiiiiiiiiiii: iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiill

To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the i_actory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

Note:

Ifyou se/ectone of thef_cto_yset picturemodes (_oo/_s,

Standard,or Movie_andthen set the dynamiccontrastto "On,"

thep/ctUf_ modeautomatical/ychangesto P/de[_fTce#7the

Picture,eoett/fTgsmen_z

#01E 079-086 566272HM195 81

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:51 PM

[

Usingtheclosedcaptionmode

The closed caption mode has two options:

• Captions_An on-screen display of the dialogue, narration,

and sound effects of TV programs and videos that are

closed captioned (usually marked "CC" in program guides).

• Text_An on-screen display of information not related to

the current program, such as weather or stock data (when

provided by individual stations).

To view captions or text:

1. Press MENU and open the Preferences menu.

2. Highlight Closed Caption Mode and then press _'.

3. Press • or • to select the desired closed caption mode and

press ENTER.

To view captions:

Highlight CC 1,

CC2, CC3, or

CC4. (CC1 displays

translation of the

primary language in

your area.)

Note: ff the [=ul,,.=._,,_._,--=_,=._*,._-.=

program or video

you sebcted Lsnot dosed captioned, no captions wl2 display

on screen,

• To view text:

Highlight T1, T2,

T3, or T4.

Note: If textL_not

available#7your

area,ablack

[ectanglemay

appearonyour

screen,If this

happen&turnthe ClosedCaptionMode Of_

• To turn off the Closed Caption mode:

Select Offin step 3 above.

Note: Aclosed caption signal may not display in the following situations:

•When avideotape has been dubbed

• When the signal teceptlon Lsweak

• When the signal reception Lsnon standald

Advanced closed captions

You can customize the closed caption display characteristics by

changing the text size, type, edge, color, and the background

color. You cannot set the Caption Text and Background as the

same color.

Note: ThisfeatureL; ava&ble for digital channelsonly

To customize the closed captions:

1. Press MENU and open

the Preferences menu.

2. Highlight Closed

Caption Adwmced and

press ENTER.

Press • or • to

highlight the

characteristic )_m want

to change, and then

press "_or _" to select the format for that characteristic.

To save the

new settings,

highlight

Done and

Reset Done

press Caption Text Color Auto

ENTER. To

revert to the

factory

defaults, highlight Reset and press ENTER.

Caption Size Auto, Small, Standard, Large

Caption TextType Auto, Default, Mono w. Serif,Pro/w. Serif,

Mono w/o Serif, Prop w/o Serif,Casual,

Cursive,SmallCapitals

Caption Text Edge Auto, None, Raised, Depressed,Uniform,

Left Drop Shadow, Right Drop shadow

Caption Text Color Auto, Black, White, Red,Green, Blue,

Yellow, Magenta, Cyan

Background Color Auto, Black, White, Red,Green, Blue,

Yellow, Magenta, Cyan

#01E 079-0 6 566272HM195 82

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:51 PM [

Usingtheclosedcaptionmode(continued)

Digital closed captions

xfimcan use the Digital CC/Audio selector to select digital

closed caption services (if available), which will temporarily

override closed captions for digital channels only.

When such services are not available, the Digital CC/Audio

selector presents a default list of services. If the selected service is

not available, the next best service will be used instead.

To select digital closed captions:

1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.

2. Highlight Digital CC/Audio Selector and press ENTER.

CableCARD

3. Press • or • to select Closed Caption, and then press "_ or

_" to select the desired service.

_i cci

#01E 079-086 566272HM195 83

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:52 PM

Adjustingtheaudio

Muting the sound

Press MUTE to partially reduce (1/2 Mute) or turn off(Mute)

the sound. Each time you press MUTE the mute mode will

change in the following order.

[_ 1/2 Mute --->Mute --->Volume -->7

If the closed caption mode is set to Offwhen }_u select

"MUTE" mode, the closed caption feature is automatically

activated. To mute the audio without automatically activating

the closed caption feature, use the VOL • button to set the

vohime to 0. See "Using the closed caption mode" on page 82

for more information on closed caption modes.

VOLV

RECALL

-- M UTE

Usingthe digital audio selector

You can use the Digital CC/Audio selector to conveniently

switch between audio tracks on a digital channel (for those

channels that have multiple audio tracks). This temporarily

overrides the audio track chosen by the language option under

Audio Setup (see "Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts," at right).

To use the digital audio selector:

1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.

2. Highlight Digital CC/

Audio Selector and press

ENTER.

3. Press • or • to select

Audio, and then press 'I

or P"to select the desired

service.

CableOARD

Service 1

Selecting stereo/SAP broadcasts

The nmlti-channel TV sound (MTS) feature allows you to

output high-fideli_ Tstereo sound. MTS also can transmit a

second audio program (SAP) containing a second language,

music, or other audio information (when provided by individual

stations).

The MTS feature is not available when the TV is in VIDEO

mode. When the TV receives a stereo or SAP broadcast, the

word "STEREO" or "SAP" appears on-screen when RECALL is

pressed.

To listen to stereo sound:

1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.

2. Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER.

3. In the MTS field, select Stereo.

;;;;; OptJea] Output Format D01by Digifa! iiiiiill

Ro_t iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiDon_

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To reset the settings to the factory defaults,

highlight Reset and press ENTER.

Note:

•Youcanleavethe TVin Stereomodebecauseit automatically

outputsthetypeof soundbeing broadcast(stereoor monaural).

• ffthe stereosoundisnoLsyselectMono to teducethenoise,

To listen to an alternate language on an ATSC digital station

(if available):

Highlight the Language field in step 3 above, and then press 'I

or P" to select the language you prefer.

To listen to a second audio program on an analog station (if

available):

Select SAP in step 3 above.

Note:

• A secondaudioprogram (SAP) canbe heard onlyon thoseTV

stationsthatoffe/ i_ Forexample,a stationmight broadcastanother

languageasa secondaudio program,ff youhaveSAPon,you will

seethe CUiTentprogramon thescreenbut heartheother language

insteadof theprogram'sno/ma/audio.

• ffyou haveSAPon andthe stationyou ale watchingis not

broadcastinga secondaudioprogram,thestatlontsnomTa/audio

willbe outpuLHowever:occasionallythere/s nosound at allin SAP

mode ff thLshappen&set the MTSfeatureto Stereomode.

#01E 079-0 6 566272HM195 84

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:53 PM [

Adjustingthe audio(continued)

Adjusting the audio quality

35m can adjust the audio qualibTby adjusting the bass, treble,

and balance.

To adjust the audio quality=

1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.

2. Highlight Audio Settings and press ENTER.

Advanced Audio Settings

3. Press • or • to highlight the item you want to adjust

(Bass, Treble, or Balance).

SBS Leve_ 85

.Press "_or _" to adjust the level.

"_makes the bass or treble weaker or increases the balance

in the left channel (depending on the item selected).

• _" makes the bass or treble stronger or increases the balance

in the right channel (depending on the item selected).

5. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To reset the settings to the fi_ctorydefaults,

highlight Reset and press ENTER.

Usingthe sub-bass system [SBS)

The sub-bass s)_tem allows )_m to enhance bass performance,

even when the volume is low.

To turn on the SBS and adjust the level:

1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.

2. Highlight Audio settings and press ENTER.

3. In the SBS field, select On.

4. Press • or • to highlight SBS Level, and then press "_or _"

to adjust the sub-bass system.

Reset HHHHHHHiDone

5. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To reset the settings to the factory defaults,

highlight Reset and press ENTER.

To turnoffthe SBS:

Select Offin step 3.

Usingthe StableSound feature

The StableSound ®feature limits the highest volume level to

prevent extreme changes in volume when the signal source

changes (for example, to prevent the sudden increase in volume

that often happens when a TV program switches to a

commercial).

To turn on the StableSound <*>feature=

1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.

2. Highlight Audio Settings and press ENTER.

3. In the StableSound field, select On.

To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To reset the settings to the factory defaults,

highlight Reset and press ENTER.

Note: The RESET function returns your audio adjustments to

the follow#Tgfactoff set_/bgs.

Bass ............. center (50)

Treble .......... center (50)

Balance ........ center (0)

StableSound... Off"

To turn off the StableSound feature:

Select Off in step 3 above.

#01E 079-086 566272HM195 85

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:54 PM [

Adjustingthe audio(continued)

Usingthe SRS WOWTM surround sound

feature

W()W _'_is a special combination of SRS Labs audio

technologies (SRS 3D, FOCUS, and TruBass) that creates a

thrilling surround sound experience with deep, rich bass from

stereo sound sources. Your TV's audio will sound fuller, richer,

and wider.

To adjust the WOW _"settings:

1. Put the TV in STEREO mode (see "Selecting stereo/SAP

broadcasts" on page 84).

2. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.

3. Highlight Advanced Audio Settings and press ENTER.

Audio Settings

Audio Setup

4. Press • or • to highlight the WOW feature you want to

adjust, and then press 'I or _ to adjust the item.

• WOW: SRS 3D -- To turn the surround sound ef}'ectOn

or Off:

Note: If the broadcast L_monaural, the 3D effect does not

wot_.

• WOW: FOCUS -- % turn the vocal emphasis effect On

or Off'.

• WOW: TruBass -- To select the desired bass expansion

level (High, Low, or Off').

5. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

Turningoff the built-in speakers

Use this feature to turn off the TV speakers when you connect

an audio system to your TV (see "Connecting a digital audio

system" and "Connecting an analog audio system" on page 20).

W0W, SRSand(Q) symbolaretrademarksof SRSLabs,inc.

WOWtechnologyisincorporatedunderlicensefromSRSLabs,inc.

To turn offthe built-in speakers:

1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.

2. Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER.

3. In the Speakers field, select Off"

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

To turn on the built-in speakers:

Select On in step 3 above.

Selecting the optical audio output

format

Use this feature to select the optical audio output format when

you connect a Dolby Digital decoder or other digital audio

system to the Optical Audio Out terminal on the TV (see

"Connecting a digital audio system" on page 20).

To select the optical audio outpm format:

1. Press MENU and open the Audio menu.

2. Highlight Audio Setup and press ENTER.

3. In the Optical Output Format field select either Dolbv

Digital or PCM, depending on your device.

4. To save the new settings, highlight Done and press

ENTER. To revert to the factory defaults, highlight Reset

and press ENTER.

#01E 079-0 6 566272HM195 86

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:55 PM F

Usingthe mediaplayer

You can use the TV's media player to view compatible JPEG

files or play compatible MP3 files on the TV using a memory

card (as described below and right). _5m can display JPEG files

in thumbnail mode or view them as a slide show.

Note:

• Never remove the memory card or turn off the TV while

using the memory card. Doing so may result in loss of data and/

or damage to the memo/y ca/d and/or 77/,SUCH DAMAGE tS NOT

COVERED BY YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY

•It/L_recommended that you back up your memory card data, Toshiba

L_not liable for any damage caused by the use of af_ymemo/y ca/d

with tbL_77/,Toshiba will not compensate fo/ any lost data or

recording(,s9 caused l_ythe use of suck cards.

• For instructions on using you/ digital camera, t_fer to the owner_

manual for your camera.

• Forinstructions on usingyourmemo/y card, refer to the owner_

manual for your memoff card

• Failure to tam proper ca_e ofa memoty card may prevent display of

p/ctu_a or playback of MP3 filea from the card or tesult #7damage to

the memo/y ca/d and/or 77/,SUCH DAMAGE IS NOT COVERED BY

YOUR TOSHIBA WARRANTY See "Memoff ca/d care and

handl#Tg" on page 90,

• Thetechnical criteria set out in this owner_ manual are meant as a

guide only

• P/ease be advised tbatyou must obtain pefTnl_s/on from the

applicable copyngbt owners to download co,oyrigbted content,

including music file& #7ar_yfo/mat, includingthe MP3 fofTrTat,pdor to

the downloading thereof. Toshiba has no dgbt to grant and does not

grant pem}Lssion to download any copyrighted contenL

Media Specifications

Memory card specifications

Supported memory card types:

-,S'_I_ memory card (ver. 1.0)

- MMC (MultiMediaCard _'*)

- Memory Stick _'_(Pro)

- xD-Picture Card"* (16MB-512MB)

- CompactFlash c_memory card (_pel)

Supported memory card format:

- FAT16

•Other memory card formats (including but not limited to FAT32

and NTFS) are not suppolted.

Maximum memory card capacity:

-512 MB.

Maximum number of files per memory card:

- JPEG = 1,000;

•All JPEGfiles overthe 1,000thona single memorycard will not

display.

-MP3 = 200.

•All MP3files overthe 200th ona singlememorycard will not play.

JPEG file specifications

Maximum displayable JPEG image size:

-8MB

•JPEGfileslargerthan8 MBwillnotdisplay.

Maximum displayable JPEG image resolution:

-6000 x 4000 pixels

MP3 file specifications

Maximum MP3 file size:

-50MB

• _ is a trademark.

• MMC and MultiMediaCard are tlademarks of Irffir_eonTechnologies AG

and licensed to MMCA (MultiMediaCard Association).

• Memoir/Stick isa trademark of Sony Corporation.

• xD Picture Card is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co.. Ltd.

• Toshibais an authorized licensee ofthe CompactFlash®and CFlogo _

registeredtrademarks.

#01E 087-092 566272HM195 87

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 4:56 PM [

Usingthemediaplayer(continued)

Media player specifications

File name restrictions:

-File names cannot contain the following characters:

\/:?"<>1"

-File names must contain US-ASCII characters onlD

- The maxinmm file name length is 255 characters.

- The memory card reader recognizes only ".rap3" and ".jpg"

file extensions.

Maximum number of nested directory levels:

-10

•Filesindirectoriesmorethan10levelsdownfromthetoplevel

directol7willnotdisplay/play.

JPEG picture viewer:

-The picture viewer supports JPEG format images only.

- JPEG images processed and/or edited on a personal

computer (PC) may not display properly or at all. Some

digital cameras may store images in a format that is not

compatible with the TV.

- The JPEG files on )_mr memory card must be in a file and

directory fbrmat compatible with the TV or they will not

display on the TV

MP3 audio player:

-The audio player supports MP3 format files onl)0

- The audio player supports only ISO-8859-1 (US-ASCII/

Western European) character sets for MP3 meta-data (e.g,

artist name, album name, song title, etc.)

-The MP3 files on )_mr memory card must be in a file and

directory fi)rmat compatible with the TV or they will not

pla>

- MP3 files processed and/or edited on a personal computer

(PC) may not play properly or at all. Some MP3 files may

be in a format that is not compatible with the TV.

MP3 files must have the following format:

• MPEG1 (ISO/IEC 11172-3) Layer3.

• SampNngfrequency-MPEGl: 32 kHz,44.1 kHz,48kHz.

• Bitrate-MPEGl:32-320 kbps.

• Channels-Stereo,Jointstereo,Dual channel,Singlechannel.

• ID3 Ver.1,Ver.2.

Using the JPEGpicture viewer

Note: if you sto_ed both JPEG and MP3 files on the same

memo/y card, the JPEG pieture viewer w#l start automat/ca/!y

when you inse/? the memo/y ca/d in the T_ Tostart the audio

p/aye/; you must fir:stpress EXIT to close the pieture viewer and

t/?er7stair the audio player while the memo/y ca/d Lsstill

irTse_te¢._See "Tosta/?the MP3 audio player when amemo/y

card is already inse/ted,"on page 90 You cannot use the

pictureviewerandaudioplayerat the sametime.

To view digital photos on your TV:

1. Insert a memory card into the appropriate memory card

slot on the side ofy_mr TV.

Note:

•Neverinsertmore thanoee memory cardat a time.

•Besure to insertthe cardcorrectly-/abe/side facing leftand

theendwiththenotchedcorner (if app/icableJ insen'edintothe

memo/yca/dsb_

•Whena CompactFlash memorycatdisinsen'edco/mct/y the

ejector buttonpopsout(see illustration below).

TVside panel

Memorycardslots

CompactFlash

memorycard

CompactFlash

ejectol button

or I

IxD-PictureCard MMC

(MultiMediaCard)

SD Memory Stick

(SecureDigital)

M memorycard

i i J

#01E O87-0 2 566272HM195 88

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:56 PM [

Usingthemediaplayer(continued)

Usingthe JPEGpictureviewer ([continued)

2. In a few seconds, the images atitomatically display on-

screen, with one asa large picture and six in thumbnail

format.

3. Press "_to rotate the large picture 90° counterclockwise.

4. Press_" to rotate the large picture 90° clockwise.

5. Press • or • to select another picture as the large picture.

6. Press ENTER to view your pictures in a slide show.

During the slide show:

•To stop on an image during the slide show, press ENTER.

To resume the slide show, press ENTER again.

• To rotate the picture, press "_or _', and then press ENTER.

• To select another image, press • or •, and then press

ENTER.

• To stop the slide show and return to the picture viewer,

press CH RTN.

• To stop the slide show and return to the regular TV screen,

press EXIT.

To set the slide show interval:

Note: Thepicture viewermustbe c/osedbefo_ you canset the

slideshow interval

l. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Slide Show Interval and press ENTER. Select the

interval from the menu sidebar (2, 5, 10, 15, or 20

seconds).

AVHD Skip Time 15 rain

To close the picture viewer:

Press EXIT to close the picture viewer and return to the regular

TV screen.

To restart the picture viewer while the memory card is still

inserted..

1. Press MENU and open the Applications menu.

2. Highlight Picture Viewer and press ENTER.

...... _, ,, _, _,__ _,:_,

Cab_eCARD

3. Follow the steps under "To view digital photos on )_mr

TV" oil the previous page.

To close the picture viewer and remove the memory card:

1. Press EXIT to close the picture viewer and return to the

regular TV screen.

NOTE: ALWAYS CLOSE THE PICTURE

VIEWER BEFORE REMOVING THE

MEMORY CARD.

Ifyou removethememorycard whi/eviewingpic'tur_s,thecard

and/or saveddata maybe dafnaged THIS TYPEOFDAMAGE

IS NOTCOVEREDUNDER YOURTOSHIBAWARRANTY

2. For a CompactFlash memory card, press the ejector button

and then pull the card straight out from the TV. For all

other memory cards pull the card straight out from the TV.

#01E 087-092 566272HM195 89

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:57 PM

[

Usingthemediaplayer(continued)

Usingthe MP3 audio player

Note:

•lfyou storedbothJPEGandMP3filesonthesamememorycard,the

JPEGpieture viewerwillstartautomat/cal!y whenyouinse/tthe

memo/yca/dintheTK Tostart"theaudioplaye/; youmustfif_tpress

EXITtoclosethepicture viewerandtfTefystsittheaudioplayer while

thememo/yca/d/_ssWinse/tedSee"TostairtheMP-_audioplayer

whenamemo/ycardisal/_ady insen'ed," at righL Youcannotuse

thepicture viewerandaudioplayerat the sametime.

•Makealldesiredadjustments tothesurTound, bass, treble, and

balancebefo/_staltifYg theMP3audioplayet:

•Pleasebeadvisedtbatyou mustobtainpefmLssion fromthe

applicablecopyr/gbtownerstodownloadcoRyr/gbted content,

/fyc/ud/fyg music'DTes,inanyfo/mat, including theMP3foff-fyat, pdor to

thedowrTIoad/fyg tlYet_of.Toshibahasno dglyt tOgrant anddoesnot

grant pe/m/_ssionto dowry/oadafyycopydgbted contefyL

To start the MP3 audio player when amemory card is not

already inserted:

1. Insert a memory card into the appropriate memory card

slot on the side of your TV (see page 88 for details).

Note:

•Never hlsert more than one memory card at a time.

•Be sure to hlsert the card correctly labelside facingleft and

theend witb thenotchedcorner (if app//cab/eJinsen_edinto the

memo/yca/d slo_

• Whena CompactFlashmemoEyca/d/s insen'edco/Tect/ythe

ejectorbuttonpops out (,seepage88),

2. If)_m have only MP3 files on the memory card, the audio

player will launch within a few seconds after being inserted

and begin playing the first MP3 file on the memory card.

3. Press iV'_ I_ to navigate to the rewind, pause>fast

forward, skip backward, skip forward, volume> and mute

buttons, or to select another MP3, and then press ENTER.

To use the mute function

Press AV "_I_ to select the I_ (mute) button, and then press

ENTER. See page 84 for details on muting the sound.

To start the MP3 audio player when a memory card is

already inserted:

1. Press MENU and open

the Applications menu.

2. Highlight Audio Player

and press ENTER.

;_>g S

TV Guide On Screen

iii 117

Digital CC/Audio SeJector

Press I,V "4I_ to

navigate to the rewind,

pause, fast forward, skip

backward, skip forward,

volume, and mute buttons, and then press ENTER.

Note: After 30 seconds ascreen save/ w/7/appeal: Toaccess the

scteen saver/bymed/Dte/_ press any button on the/emote control

To close the MP3 audio player:

Press EXIT to close the audio player and return to the regular

TV screen.

To close the MP3 audio player and remove the memory card:

1. Press EXIT to close the audio player and return to the

regular TV screen.

2. For a CompactFlash memory card, press the ejector button

and then pull the card straight out from the TV. For all

other memory cards, pull the card straight out from the TV.

Memory card care and handling

Use index labels made exclusively for your specific brand of

memory card. Do not use commercially sold labels which

can cause a malfunction when the card is inserted or ejected.

If the image does not appear correctly or the audio file does

not play correctl> clean the metallic area of the memory

card using a soft, dr> lint-free, anti-static cloth, and then

reinsert the card.

Prevent the metallic area on the memory card from coming

in contact with dust, dirt, or other foreign particles. Do not

touch the metallic area of the memory card with ?_mr hands

or otherwise handle it with anything other than a soft, dr>

lint-free, anti-static cloth.

Note: Tosbibaisnotliableforany damagecausedt_ytheuse

of anymemorycardwithtb/;sTg Tosbibawillnot compefysate

for anylostdataor recordingscausedby the useof sucbcards.

NOTE: ALWAYS CLOSE THEA UDIO

PLAYER BEFORE REMOVING THE

MEMORY CARD.

If you_move thememory ca/d whileplayingMP3 fi/ea,thecard

and/or saveddatamaybe damaged.THISTYPEOFDAMAGE

IS NOTCOVEREDUNDER YOURTOSHIBAWARRANTY

#01E 087-0 2 566272HM195 90

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:58 PM [

Settingthe On/Off Timer

You can use the On/OffTimer to turn the TV on and off at a

preset time on a rectirring basis.

Note: You must fi/st set the time (see page 50),

To set the On/Off Timer:

1. PressMENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight On/OffTimer and press ENTER.

3. In the DAY field, press "_or _" to select the recurrence

(weekends weekdays Every Day etc).

4. Press • to highlight the Time field, and then use the

Number buttons to enter the time you want the TV to turn

on.

5. When the AM/PM field is highlighted, press _ to select

AM or PM.

6. Press • to highlight the TV ON Duration field, and then

press "_or _ to select the length of time until the TV turns

off"(30 Minutes, 12 Hours, 8 Hours, 4 Hours, 2 Hours, 1

Hour).

7. Highlight Done and press ENTER.

8. Turn off"the TV. The TV will turn on automatically on the

day(s) and at the time you set. The TV will then turn off"

automatically after the length of time you set in the TV

ON Duration field.

Note:

•WhenapowerfmTureoccurs,theOn/OffTffnersettings may

becleared.

•Todisp/g!ytheOn/Off77metsettifTgl, pressRECALL

Toturn off the On/OffTimer:

SelectNot Set in step ,3above.

Reset iiiiiii Cancel iiiiiii Done iiiiiiiiii!!i

Settingthe sleep timer

You can set the sleep timer to turn off'the TV after a set length

of time (maximum of 3 hours). The sleep timer turns off"the TV

one time onl> as opposed to the On/OffTimer, which turns off"

the TV on a recurring basis.

To set the sleep timer:

PressSLEEP on the remote control to setthe length of time until the

TV turns off Repeatedlypress SLEEP to increasethe time in 1G

minute increments or press • or • to increase or decreasethe time

in 1Gminute increments, to a maximum of 3 hours and 00 minutes.

To cancel the sleep timer:

Press SLEEP until it is set to 0.

To set the sleep timer using the on-screen menus:

1. PressMENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Sleep Timer and press ENTER.

3. Press the Number buttons to enter the length of time in

10-minute increments.

4. Highlight Done and press ENTER.

Note:

•Whenapowerfai/ureoccurs,thesleeptimersettingmaybe c/e_d

•Todhplaythe amountoftffne left on thesleep time/;pressRECALL

Todisplay the remaining sleep time:

Press SLEEE

Note:

Amessage wl7/dlspl_tyon-screen when there/s one minute

rema/h/hg on the sleep t/me_:

#01E 08%092 566272HM195 91

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 4:59 PM

[

DisplayingTVsettinginformation Understandingtheautopoweroff

on-screenusingRECALL feature

To display TV setting information on-screen:

Press RECALL on the remote control. The following

information will display on-screen (if"applicable):

• Current input (ANT 1, ANT 2, VIDE() 1, etc.)

• If'ANT 1 or ANT 2 is the current input, whether it is

Cable TV ("CABLE") or of'f-air ("TV")

• Channel number (if'in

ANT 1 or ANT 2 mode)

• Signal strength indicator

(bar graph in lower right

corner of'screen; for

ATSC signal only)

Note: Thesignal strength

indicatorwillreactto fading

andincreasing srgnals

• Time (if'set)

• On/Of'f'timer settings (if'set)

• Remaining time on sleep timer (if'set)

• Remaining time on game timer (if'set)

• Stereo or SAP audio status

• V-Chip rating status

• Picture size

• Tuner hold* (if applicable)

*/fyou ate/ecotding ononetuner(for example, the digital

tuner3, youwillbeableto change channelsontheothertuner

only (the analog tuner#7thisexample). Thetunerfromwbich

youate recotd#Tg Ls'bnhold"(/:e, locked)soyourtecord#Tgs

willnotbeaffectedt_ychannd changes.

• Video resolution

• Lamp mode (appears only if the TV is in High Bright

mode)

To close TV setting information on-screen:

Press RECALL again.

Sample RECALL screen

The TV will automatically turn itself`off after approximately 15

minutes if'it is tuned to a vacant channel or a station that

completes its broadcast for the da> This feature fimctions in

ANT 1 and ANT 2 modes only.

Understandingthelastmode

memoryfeature

If the power is cut off while you are viewing the TV, the Last

Mode Memory feature automatically turns on the TV when

the power is resupplied.

NOTE: kbu should unplug the TVt; power cord/f/t/s possff_/e

that you will be away from the TV for an extended petTod of t/me

after the power/s testorec.L

UsingtheGrayLevelfeature

The gray level feature will set the sidebars to three different

levelsof'darkness. Sidebars are the blanks spaces on either side

of a 4:3 viewing area.

To set the gray level of the sidebarst

1. Press MENU and open the Setup menu.

2. Highlight Gray Level and press _'.

3. Press • or • to select your desired level of darkness

(1 - Black, 2 - Dark Gray or 3 - Gray).

S_eep TAmer 1

6r,/6flTimei ):_>

giic_&gh0w,,,{a}va, >ga_

x,&,g_i_Ti,,,a igmir,

Note:

•Thegray level feature does not af&ct video being viewed in

169 aspect ratio

• When receiving asignal that has sidebars {e.g., 4.,?aspect

ratio video over a 1080/or 720p signal), the gray level feature

will not be applied to tbe sidebat:_

#01E 087-0 2 566272HM195 92

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 5:00 PM [

The Locks menu includes the Enable Rating Blocking, Edit Rating Limits, Channels Block, Input Lock, Panel Lock, Game Timer,

and New PIN Code features. You can use these features after entering the correct PIN code.

EnteringthePINcode

1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.

Input Lock

Game Timer elf

New PIN Code

2. Press •, which displays the PIN code entry screen.

• The Lock System screen (below) appears ira PIN code has

not been stored. Press the Channel Number buttons to

enter a new fi.mr-digitcode, enter the code a second time to

confirm, and press ENTER.

Cancel Done

• The Locks/Active screen (below) appears if the PIN code is

already stored. Press the Channel Number buttons to enter

your four-digit code and press ENTER.

If the wrong PIN code is entered, the message "Incorrect PIN

• o ' P_

code, please tr) %am, appears. Highlight Retry and press

ENTER. Enter the code again and press ENTER.

When the correct PIN code is entered, the Locks menu opens.

Fiont Panel Lock Off

Game Timer Off

Ifyoucannotrememberyour

PINcode

While the PIN code entering screen is displayed, press RECALL

four times within five seconds. The PIN code will be cleared and

you can enter a new PIN code.

ChangingyourPINcode

1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.

2. Press • to display the PIN code entering screen.

3. Enter )qmrfour-digit PIN code and press ENTER.

4. Press • to highlight New PIN Code and press ENTER.

5. Press the Number buttons to enter a new four-digit code.

Retype the numbers to confirm the PIN code you entered.

6. Press ENTER. The new PIN code is now active.

#01E 093-096 566272HM195 93

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 5:01 PM

[

BlockingTVprogramsandmoviesbyratingIV-Chip(}

Some TV programs and movies include signals that classii_,the

content of the program (violence, sex, dialog, language). The

V-Chip feature in this TV detects the signals and blocks the

programs according to the ratings }_)uselect. (See the tables at

right for rating descriptions.)

Note: Rating blocking isafunctionofthe¼Ch/io feature#7this

TV,whichsupportstheUS.¼Chipsystefn on/y

To block and unblock TV programs and movies:

1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.

2. Press • to display the PIN code entering screen.

3. Enter )_ur four-digit PIN code and pressENTER.

4. Press • to highlight Enable Rating Blocking.

5. Press_" and then • to select On, and then pressENTER.

8areafi,,,ei

6. Press • to highlight Edit Rating Limits and press ENTER.

input Lock

}}0hiPa,_;iLo_ 6ii

The Edit Rating Limits screen (below) appears.

7. Press A•,_ II,and then press ENTER to select the level of

blocking }_mprefer. A box with an "x" is a rating that will

be blocked. As }_mhighlight a rating, a definition for the

rating appears at the bottom of the screen.

8. When done selecting the ratings you want to block,

highlight Done and press ENTER.

_!iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiil_l_l_l_i_

Independent rating system for broadcasters

TV-MA MatureAudienceOnly (Thisprogram isspecificallydesigned

to beviewed by adultsand thereforemaybe unsuitablefor

childrenunder 17.)

L) Crudeor indecentlanguage S) Explicitsexualactivity

V) Graphicviolence

TV-14 ParentsStronglyCautioned(Thisprogramcontainssome

materialthat manyparentswould find unsuitablefor children

under 14yearsof age.)

D) Intenselysuggestivedialog L) Strong,coarselanguage

S) Intensesexualsituations V) Intenseviolence

TV-PG ParentalGuidanceSuggested(Thisprogramcontains

materialparentsmayfind unsuitablefor youngerchildren.)

D) Somesuggestivedialog L) Infrequentcoarselanguage

S) Somesexualsituations _D Moderateviolence

13/-G GeneralAudience(Most parentswould find this program

suitablefor allages.)

]W-Y7, Directedto Older Children(Thisprogramisdesigned

I3/-Y7FV for childrenage 7 and above.Note:Programsinwhich

fantasyviolencemaybemore intenseor morecombative

than other programsin this categoly are designatedY7F_)

TV-Y All Children (Thisprogramis designedto beappropriatefor

all children.)

Independent rating system for movies

XX-rated (For adultsonly)

NC-17 Not intended for anyone17 andunder

RRestricted(Under 17requiresaccompanyingparentor adul0

PG-13 ParentsStronglyCautioned(Somematerialmaybe

inappropriatefor childrenunder 13)

PG ParentalGuidanceSuggested(Somematerialmaynot be

suitablefor children)

GGeneralAudience(Appropriatefor allages)

Note:

•lfyou place an '5<"in the box next to "None" Rated or "No Rating."

programs rated "None" or "No Rating" will be blocked. Howeve/; if

the program does not provide any rating infom}ation, nothing will be

dLsplgtyedin the RECALL screen and ratings b/ockingl will not take

effec_

• Todisplay the rating of the program you ale watching press

RECALL on the temote control ff lt ls not rated, the WOld "NONE"

appea_a.

TV PG L V NONE

#01E 093-0 6 566272HM195 94

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 5:02 PM [

Blockingchannels Unlockingprogramstemporarily

With the Channels Block feature, you can block specific

channels. You will not be able to tune blocked channels unless

you clear the setting first.

To block channels:

1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.

2. Press • to display the

PIN code entering

screen.

Enter }_mrfour-digit

PIN code and press

ENTER (see page 93 for

details).

Press • to highlight

Channels Block and then press ENTER.

Using the A• ._ _,.buttons select the input for which you

want to change the rating limits (ANT 1, ANT 2, or Cable

Box, if connected) and press ENTER.

A list of the channels available for that input will be

displayed along with the call letters for each channel, if

available.

Input Lock

_i Game T_mer Off _

ii! New PIN Code ii

Press A• to highlight the

channel }_3tiwant to

block, then press

ENTER, which puts an

"x" in the box next to

that channel.

Repeat step 6 for other

channels you want to

block.

iiiii:i:i:i:i:i:i:H

8. Highlight Done and press ENTER.

To unblock individual channels:

In step 6 above, press A• to highlight the channel you want to

unblock, and then press ENTER to remove the × from the box

and highlight Done, and then press ENTER.

To block all channels at once:

Highlight Block All in step 6 above, and then highlight Done,

and press ENTER.

To unblock all locked channels at once:

Highlight Allow All in step 6

above, and then highlight

Done, and press ENTER.

If}_m try to watch a TV program that exceeds the rating limits

you set, the TV enters program lock mode. xfimcan either

unlock the program temporarily or select a non-locked program

to watch.

Note: Channel b/ock/bg may not take effect/Tyou have acable box

connected and use the cable box controls to change channels

To temporarily unlock the program:

1. Press MUTE.

2. Enter }_mrfour-digit PIN code and press ENTER. If the

correct code is entered,

the program lock mode

is released and the

normal picture appears.

All locking is disabled

until the TV is turned

o< and will be enabled ................................................................................................................................................

when the TV is turned on again.

xfimcan use the Input Lock feature to lock the video input

sources (VIDEO 1,VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3, ColorStream HD-1,

ColorStream HD-2, HDMI 1/HDMI 2) and channels 3 and 4.

%u will not be able to view the input sources or channels until

)_)u turn off"the input lock.

To lock the video inputs:

1. Press MENU and highlight the Loclcsmenu icon.

2. Press • to display the PIN code entering screen.

3. Enter }_tir four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.

4. Press • to highlight Input Lock and press _'.

5. Press • or • to select the level of video input locking you

prefer, as described below:

Video: Locks VIDEO 1,

VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,

ColorStream HD1 /

HD2, and HDMI.

Video+: Locks VIDEO

1, VIDEO 2, VIDEO 3,

ColorStream HD1 /

HD2, HDMI 1/HDMI

2, and channels 3 and 4.

Select Video+ if)_m use the antenna terminal to play a

video tape.

Note: Make sure the POP is not on channel 3 or 4

Off: Unlocks all video input sources.

6. Press ENTER.

Note: When aCab/eCARD _Mis inse/_ed, Video+ will behave the same as

Video/ock

#01E 093-096 566272HM195 95

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 5:02 PM [

Usingthe GameTimerTM

xfi_tlcan use the GameTimer to set a time limit for playing a

video game (30-120 minutes). When the GameTimer is

activated, the TV enters VIDEO LOCK mode and locks out

the input source for the video game device.

To set the GameTimer_":

1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.

2. Press • to display the PIN code entering screen.

3. Enter }_ur four-digit PIN code and press ENTER.

4. Press • to highlight Game Timer and press _'.

5. Press • or • to select the length of time until the Video

Lock is activated (30, 60, 90, or 120 minutes) and press

ENTER.

g 0 o_ 0ff

ir,puiE0_ 6ii _0 mia

=..........................

New PIN Code

To cancel the GameTimer_M:

Select Offin step 5 above.

To deactivate the video lock once the GameTimer has

activated it:

Set the VIDEO LOCK to Off (see "Locking video inputs" on

page 95).

Note:

•A messagewillappear on screenwhen Z0 rrT#Tutes,3

ffTifTute& and 1minute/emain on the Game77mer:

• ffthe TVbses power wit/} t#netemainingon the GarneT#he/;

wf?ef7power istestoredthe TVwilleRterVIDEOLOCKmode

(asif the GameT#nerhad expired]andyou willhaveto

deactivatethevideo/ock (asdescribedabove).

Usingthe controlpanellockfeature

xfimcan lock the control panel to prevent your settings from

being changed accidentally (by children, for example). When

the control panel lock is On, none of the controls on the TV

control panel will operate except POWER.

To lock the control panel:

1. Press MENU and highlight the Locks menu icon.

2. Press • to displ Uthe PIN code entering screen.

3. Enter }_mrfour-digit PIN code and press ENTER.

4. Press • to highlight Front Panel Lock.

5. Press_" to highlight On and press ENTER. When the

control panel is locked and a button on the control panel

except POWER button is pressed, the message "Not

Available" appears.

i Game Timer Off

New PIN Code

To unlock the control panel:

Highlight Offin step 5 above, or press and hold the

VOLUME - button on the TV control panel fi._rabout 10

seconds until the volume icon appears on-screen.

TV control panel

POWER

VOLUME-

GUlD_

#01E 093-0 6 566272HM195 96

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 5:03 PM [

Beforecalling a sen/icetechnician,pleasecheckthe followingtable for a possible causeof the symptomand some solutions.

Solution

Symptom

TV will not turn on

Noisypicture

tfideoInput Selection

pmb/eres

Diff_notview exterea/s/igna/s

or channel 3 or 4

B/ac/<box on screen

Poor oo/o1or no color

POPproblems

Picture bnlgfltnes_dTangessoon

after t_fTJ#W on TV

Poor coreposite o1

S video picture

Picture and sound are out of sync

Picture problems

Memory card

pmblems

•Make sure the power cord is plugged in. and then press POWER.

• The remote control batteries may be dead. Replace the batteries or tly the control panel buttons.

• If you have recently replaced the lamp unit, make sure the lamp unit and lamp unit door are installed properly (pages

103 105).

• The lamp unit may need to be replaced (pages 103 105}. Also see "LED indications" on page 99.

• Check the antenna/cable connections (Chapter 2}.

• Press IN PUT on the remote control or TV/VIDEO on the TV control panel and select a valid video input source (page

67}. If no device is connected to any of the inputs on the TV. no picture will display when you select that palSicular

input source. Fordevice connection details, see Chapter 2.

• Antenna reception may be poor. Use a highly directional outdoor antenna (if applicable}.

• The station may have broadcast difficulties. ]iy another channel.

• Actjustthe picture qualities (page 79}.

• If you are using a VCR. make sure the TV/VCR button on the remote control is set correctly (page 26).

• If you havetwo VCRsconnected to your TV, do not connect the sameVCR to the TV'soutput and input connections

at the same time (page 18}.

• Do not connect a standard video cable and an S video cable to VIDEO 1 or VI DEC 2 on the TV back (or VIDEC 3 on

the TV side} at the same time (Chapter 2}.

• If you arewatching a tuned analog channel (off air broadcast or Cable TV), set the CableClearR/DNR feature to AUTO

to reduce visible interference in the TV picture (page 80}.

• If the Input Selection window does not appear when you press INPUTon the remote control or TV/VI DEC on the TV

control panel,press INPUT or TV/VIDEO a second time. which will change to the nextvideo input source and display

the Input Selection window.

• If you cannot view signals from external devices connected to VIDEO 1, Vl DEC 2, Vl DEC 3. or ColorStream,:'or from

charmels 3 or 4. makesure the Input Lock is set to Off (page 95}.

• Set the Closed Caption feature to Off (page 82}.

• The station may have broadcast difficulties. ]iy another channel.

• Actjustthe Tint and/or Color (page 79}.

• When the ColorStream_ signal source is active,the VIDEO OUT terminal outputs blank video. Toreceive video from the

VI DEC OUT signal, astandard video or S video IN terminal must be used instead of the ColorStleam _ connections.

• The VIDEC OUT terminal will not output the POP picture (pages 18 and 76}.

• If you label all of the inputs as "Hide." the POPfeature will be disabled. If you then attempt to access the POPfeature,

the message "NOT AVAILABLE" will appear on screen (page 76}.

• If you set the lamp mode to Low Power. eachtime you turn on the TV.the lampwill stalS out in High Bright mode but

will switch to Low Power mode in approximately 1 minute. You will notice a change in screen brightness when this

happens. This is normal and is not a sign of malfunction. (See page 75.}

• If this TV is connected to an external A/V device (e.g., DVD player,video game system, set-top box, etc.} Always try to

use the ColorStreamvideo jacks (and correspondir_gaudio jacks} or the H DMI input (if available) for connection to

such external A/V device.This will reduce the amotmt of video processing to be performed by the television.

• As with allproducts that contain a digital display, in rare instances, when viewing certain content (e.g..television

broadcasts,video games, DVD}, you may notice that the sound and picture are slightly out of sync. This phenomenon

can be caused by various factors including, without limitation, video processing within the TV. video processing in an

attached gaming system, and video processing/different compression rates used by broadcasters in their

programming. You maywant to try one or moreof the following suggestions, which may help to reduce the effect of

this phenomenon:

If the TV is cormected to an AA/receiver that hasa programmable audio delay feature, use this feature to help

synchronize the sound to the picture.

If you notice this phenomenon only on celtain TV channels, please contact your local broadcast, cable, or satellite

provider to inform them of this issue.

• Make sure you are using a supported or valid memoly caretformat (page 87}.

• Make sure you havesaved the picture flies in the comect file format (page 87).

• The caretmay be inselsed improperly. Removethe card and reinselSit (page 88}.

• The memory card may be empty.

• The memory card may be damaged.

#01E 097-102 566272HM195 97

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/B5, 5:03 PM

Symptom Solution

"Now Booting" message appears

on screen

Sound problems

Remote conhol problems

Charmeltuning problems

Closed caption problems

Rating Blocking (V Chip} problems

Recording problems

TV stops responding to conhols

Other problems

•If you unplug the power cord. when you plug the power cord in again the message "Now Booting" will displayed on

the screen until the picture appears or the yellow LED will blink until the TV enters standby mode. This is normal and is

not a sign of malfunction.

• Checkthe anterma/cable connections (see Chapter 2}.

• The station may have broadcast difficulties. ]iy another charmel.

• The sound maybe muted. Press VOLUME.

• If you hear no sound, tly setting the MTS feature to STEREO mode (page 88}.

• Make sure the Speakers function inthe Audio Setup menu isset correctly (page 86).

• If you are not receiving a second audio program from a known SAP source, makesure the MTS feature is set to SAP

mode (page 84).

• If you hearaudio that seems "incorrect" for the program you are watching (such as music or a foreign language}, the

SAP mode may be on. Set the MTS feature to STEREOmode (page 84).

• When using an externalaudio amplifier, if you connect the amplifier to the VAR.AUDIO OUT terminals, the volume of

the TV and amplifier must be set above 0 or you will not hearany sound (page 20}.

• Make sure the remote conhol is set to the correct device mode (page 28}.

• Removeall obstructions between the remote control and the TV.

• The remote conhol batteries may be dead. Replace the batteries (page 28).

• Your TV remote control may not operate certain features on your external device. Referto the owner's manual for your

other device to determine its available features. If your TV remote control does not operate a specific feature on

another device, use the remote control that came with the device (page 28}.

• Ifthe TV still does not act as expected,usethe RestoreFactoryDetaultsprocedure asdescribed on page 52.

• Make sure the remote conhol is set to the correct device mode (page 28}.

• The channel may havebeen elased from the charmel memory by the Charmel Add/Delete feature. Add the charmel to

the channel memoiy (page 83}.

• Tile channel may be blocked by the Channels Block teature. Unblock the channel (page 95).

• If you are unableto tune digital channels, check the antenna configuration (page 41}. If you arestill unable to tune

digital channels, clear all channelsfrom the charmel list (page 83} and reprogram channels into the charmel memory

(page/42}. If you are still unable to tune digital charmels, usethe Restore Factol_/Defaults procedure as described oil

page 52. Also see "TV stops responding to controls" and "Other problems." below.

• If the program or video you selected is not closed captioned, no captions will display on screen (page82).

• If text is not available,a black rectangle mayappear oil screen. If this happens, turn offthe closed caption feature

(page 82}.

• A closedcaption signalmay not display correctly in the following situations: a) when a videotape hasbeen dubbed: b}

when the signal reception isweak: or c) when the signal reception isnonstandard (page 82}.

• If you forget your PIN code: While the PIN code entering screen is displayed, press RECALL four times within 5

seconds. The PlN code you previously stored will be cleared (page 93).

• Tile VChip feature is available for the U.S. VChip system only (page 94).

• If you use the TV's remote control to stalSrecording, you will not be able to change inputs (page 67}, open the POP

window (page 76), or open the FAYSCAN multi window (page 78}. If you attempt to do so. the message "Not

Available While Recording" will appear on screen.

• If you are recording a digital charmel,you will only be able to change analog channels while the recording is in

progress. If you are recording an analog channel, you will only be able to change digital channels while the recording is

in progress. This is because the TV tuner that is being recorded (digital or analog} will be locked oil the channel that is

currently recording.

• It is recommended that you use the TMs remote control to staiSrecording. If you use a device other than the TV's

remote control to staiSrecording and then attempt to access afeature that is normally denied during recording (POP

mode. FAVSCAN mode. changing inputs,} the recorded audio and/or video may not be what you intended to record.

See pages 67 and 71.

• If you connecteda Symbio_MAVHD recorder,in order to use itsfuji functionality,you mustfirst set up the

TV Guide OnScreenTMsystem(page 23 and Chapter 2).

• If the TV stops responding to the controls on the remote control or TV control panel and you carmot turn offthe TV.press

and hold the POWERbutton on the TV control panelfor 5 or moresecondsto resetthe TV.

• If your TV's problem has not been addressed in this ]ioubleshooting section or the recommended solution has not

worked, use the Restore FactoryDefaults procedure as described on page 52.

#01E 097-1 2 566272HM195 98

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 5:04 PM r

LEDindications

The yellmvand blue LED lights on tile TV (at the bottom center of"the TV) indicate tileTV's status, as described below:

• Blue ON (solid) and Yellow OFF = The TV power cord is plugged in.

• Yellow ON (solid) and Blue OFF = A recording is in progress while the TV is OFE

• Blue ON (solid) and Yellow ON (solid) = A recording is in progress while the TV is ON.

• Yellow and/or Blue blinking (see table below).

Note: If the TVloses A/C power (e,g, a power outage occu/:_ or the power cord L_unp/ugged], w/Tel7power is testo_ecJ,the yellow LED wi// b/#Tk

wh#e the TV L_bootinw until the remote control L_usable. ThL_L_normal and is not a sign of malfunction,

TIMER

I i--,

TVfront

BlueLED

Yellow LED

LED Indication Condition Solution

1)Yellow blinks continuously Thelamp unit door is not seated TurnOFFthe TV and unplugthe power cord.Review"Howto

at 3-secondintervals, properly, replacethe lamp unit" on pages 104-105to ensurethat the lamp

Blue blinks continuously dooris installedsecurely.Ifthe problempersists,contactaToshiba

at 0.5-secondintervals. AuthorizedServiceCenter.

Thelamp is not working properly.2)Yellow blinks continuously

at 0.5-secondintervals;

Blue is ON (solid).

3)Yellow and Blue blink

continuouslyat

1-secondintervals.

The lamp is not working properly

after the eighth automatic restart

(see item #2).

The TV will automatically try to restart itself eight times (see item

#3:).

Turnthe TV OFFandthen ON again.Ifthe problempersists,

replacethe lamp unit (see pages 103-105). Ifthe problemstill

exists,contactaToshibaAuthorizedServiceCenter.

4)Yellow is OFF; An abnormaltemperature TurnOFFthe TV.Checkto makesureallslots andopeningsin the

Blue blinks at 0.2-second increasehasoccurred. TV cabinetarenot covered,blocked,or dusty.TurnON the TV

intervals4 times (repeat). again.Ifthe problempersists,contacta ToshibaAuthorizedService

Center.

5)Yellow is OFF; Abnormaloperation TurnOFFthe TV and unplugthe power cord.Plugthe power cord

Blue blinks continuously (irlcludingcoolingfan stop), inagainandturn ON the TV.Ifthe problempersists,contacta

at 0.5-secondintervals. ToshibaAuthorizedServiceCenter.

6)Yellow is OFF; Abnormaloperationof BUSline. TurnOFFthe TV and unplugthe power cord.Plugthe power cord

Blue blinks continuously inagainandturn ON the TV.Ifthe problempersists,contacta

at 1-secondintervals. ToshibaAuthorizedServiceCenter.

7) Yellow is OFF; Thecolor wheel hasstopped. TurnOFFthe TV and unplugthe power cord.Plugthe power cord

Blue blinks at 0.2-second inagainandturn ON the TV.Ifthe problempersists,contacta

intervals3 times (repeat). ToshibaAuthorizedServiceCenter.

#01E 097-102 566272HM195 99

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 5:04 PM

TVGuideOnScreenTM FAQs

The _llowing are frequently asked questions about the TV Guide On Screen_ system. The answers represent tile most likely solutions to the

problem.

After you set tip tile TV Guide On Screen "_systen_ (Chapter 5), tlle

program guide opens atltomatically by default when you turn on

the TV. You cm turn off"the automatic program guide (see page 40)

and instead press tile TV GUIDE button on the remote control to

manually open the TV Guide On Screen TMprogram guide.

SETUP

1. Q; What ifI move and my ZIP code or postal code changes?

A: Highlight Setup ill tile Service Bar. Press • to highlight

Change System Settings (page 65), and then press ENTER.

Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new information

(see Chapter 5 for details). It can take up to 24 hours to

receive new data.

2. Q; What ifI change my cable hook-up to antenna or vice

versa?

A: Highlight Setup in tile Service Bar. Press • to highlight

Change System Settings (page 65), and then press ENTER.

Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new input

information and rescan channels for the new input (see

Chapter 5 for details).

3. Q; What ifI change cable boxes?

A: Highlight Setup ill the Service Bar. Press• to highlight

Change System Settings (page 65), and then press ENTER.

Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new input

information and rescan channels for tile new input (see

Chapter 5 for details).

4. Q; I used to have a cable box, but now Iget direct cable.

What do I do?

A: Highlight Setup ill the Service Bar.Press• to highlight

Change System Settings (page 65), and then press ENTER.

Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new input

information and rescan channels for tile new input (see

Chapter 5 for details).

5. Q: If I add a recorder or change my cable service, how do I

change my Setup information?

A: Highlight Setup ill the Service Bar. Press • to highlight

Change System Settings (page 65), and then press ENTER.

Follow the on-screen prompts to enter new information

(see Chapter 5 for details). It can take up to 24 hours to

receive new data.

6. Q; Why does it take up to 24 hours for the TV Guide

On Screen'" system to be ready for use?

A: The initial setup process consists of finding the stations ill your

area that carry the TV Guide On Screen L'_system data and

tuning to those stations m receive tile setup and listings dam.

7. Q; I had a power outage. Do I need to go through initial

setup of the TV Guide On Screen'" system again?

A: No. The information )TOIlentered is stored in the TV Guide

On Screen _' system memor>

Note: For Cablebox use& the TVfnust be OFFand theCable

box mustbeleft ON for the TVGuideOn Sc[_ef7rM,systemto

receivechannd line upinformation,

8. Q; How do I connect the G-LINK'" (IR blaster) cable to

the G-LINK'" input on the TV?

A: See Chapter 2: Connecting your TV ill this manual.

You also call refer to the TV Guide On Screen _'' prompts

during VCR or Cable box setup.

9. Q; When will I be able to view my TV program listings and

use other TV Guide On Screen'" system features?

A: You will be able to use initial program listings within 24

hours of initial setup. It may take up to one week to receive

the full eight days of program listings.

10. Q; What should I do if I cannot complete initial setup?

A: If you are unable to complete initial setup using tile owner's

manual and the on-screen prompts, please call Toshiba's

National Service Division at 1-800-631-3811.

11. Q; IfI make a mistake during setup, how do Igo back to

the previous step?

A: Complete the remainingsetup steps.When "Confirming Your

Settings"appears,select"No, repeatsetupprocess."Followthe

on-screenprompts and input the correctinformation.

12. Q; What if the channel number is not visible on my cable

box?

A: Your cable box may be defaulting to a clock or time display

once the channel changes. Watch the box carefullywhen

testing the cable box brand code to see if the channel

changes to 09.

13. Q; Why won't my VCR turn on?

A: There are several possibilities:

a) Arl incorrect or "no VCR" code was entered during the

TV Guide On Screen _' initial setup. Press the TV GUIDE

button on the remote control, and then press I_ to

highlight SETUP. Press • to highlight "Change system

settings," and then press ENTER. Follow the on-screen

prompts to select the correct VCR information.

b) Make sure the G-LINK _M(IR blaster) cable is connected

correctly (see page 25).

c) The VCR record timer is on. Turn off the timer.

d) The wired remote VCR is incompatible.

#01E 097-1 2 566272HM195 100

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/B5, 5:04 PM [

TVGuideOnScreenTM FAQs(continued)

CHANNEL LINEUPS & LISTINGS

14. Q; Why aren't all my channels initially displayed?

A: After initial setup, approximately 120 channels are

automatically displayed. The user may use the "Change

channel display" feature to turn ON or OFF additional

channels.

Note: Eventhoughyou havethe optionof enablingmaqy

mole channels,thesystemmay nothavethe memo/ycapacity

to hold detailedp/ogram descaptionsfor allof them.

15. Q; W'hen I opened the TV Guide On Screen'" system, I was

asked to choose from more than one channel lineup.

W'hat should I do?

A: Select the lineup that most closely matches the one for your

area. If after you choose the lineup, )Tot,want to make

changes to it, highlight Setup in the Service Bar. Press • to

select Change Channel Display. Follow the on-screen

insmictions.

16. Q; Why do all my channds display "No Listing?"

A: The TV Guide On Screen'_ system has not vet received its

data download. The phrase "No Listing" wiil be replaced

with program information during the next download cycle,

which will occur within the next 24-hour period.

17. Q; Why do some of my channels display "No Listing?"

A: There are several possibilities:

a) The channels in question were recently turned ON (in

Change channel display) and TV Guide On Screen _ has

yet to receive its next data download.

b) After completing the initial setup, the first data download

of the day was interrupted by a VCR recording.

c) The TV power cord was left unplugged for an extended

period of time and the TV Guide On Screen _''system was

unable to receive program listings during the scheduled

download cycle.

d) Poor recepuon caused some of the data to be missed.

e) The cable box was turned OFE The TV prover cord must

be plugged in and the cable box must be ON.

g) A/V Cable: The VCR was turned OFE If the connection

includes stereo cables with cable box to VCR and stereo

connection from VCR to television, the VCR must be ON.

18. Q; A show entry in the TV Guide On Screen'" system reads

"No Listing." What does that mean?

A: Show information for that entry was not available during

the last TV Guide On Screen _'_'system information update

(download). Show information is updated on a daily basis.

19. Q; I have seen the word "download" in reference to the

TV Guide On Screen'" system. What does that mean?

A: "Download" refers to the times throughout the day when

the TV Guide On Screen '_' system is receiving channel and

listings information from your Cable or over-the-air

antenna transmission.

20. Q! After some show titles, I have noticed from 1 to 4 stars

(****). What does that mean?

A: These stars are a broadcast-industry ratings system used to

inform you of a show's quali_. The more stars, the better

the rating.

21. Q; What do the colors for shows in the Listings and Search

screens indicate?

A: Green = Sports;Dark Blue = Children's; Purple = Movies;

Teal = Other Show.

22. Q; How do I add, delete, or change the assigned number of

channels on the TV Guide On Screen'" system?

A: See the "Change channel display" section in theTV Guide

On Screen _Mowner's manual (see page 65).

23. Q; Why are some of my channels listed on the wrong

number?

A: There are several possibilities (see page 65 for details):

a) Incorrect channel lineup was selected. Access "Change

system settings" and choose "Yes, but my channel lineup is

incorrect," and then reselecc the correct lineup.

b) Channel lineup changes have not yet been processed. Use

the "Change chamlel display" feature to make adjustments.

c) Initial setup was done incorrectly (that is, the wrong

ZiP/postal code was entered.) Redo the initial setup.

24. Q; Why doesn't the program highlighted match up with

the video window on my TV screen?

A: There are several possibilities (see page 65 for details):

a) The station in question made a late change to its scheduled

program listing and the TV Guide On Screen"' system has

not yet been updated.

b) The TV is receiving broadcasts through a modified or

boosted antenna system or a satellite dish (not supported

by the TV Guide On Screen _" system).

c) Initial setup was done incorrecd> (i.e., the wrong

ZiP/postal code was entered.) Redo the initial setup.

d) Incorrect channel lineup was selected. Access "Change

system settings" and choose "Yes, but my channel lineup

is incorrect," and then reselect the correct lineup (see page

65 for details.)

e) The video window may be locked. Press SPLIT to unlock.

25. Q; Can I move my favorite stations to the top of the

TV Guide On Screen'" display screen?

A: Yes. Use the "Change channel display"[cature to make

adjustments (see page 65). Highlight the station callletters

to be moved, then use the up/down arrows, and/or

Number buttons to reassign the position of the station.

#01E 097-102 566272HM195 101

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/B5, 5:05 PM [

TVGuideOnScreenTM FAQs(continued)

OPERATIONS

26. Q; How can I look for a specific show in tile TV Guide

On Screen'" system?

A: SEARCH lets you find shows by keDvord, alphabetically,

or by category (HDTV, Movies, Sports, Children,

Educational, News, Mlrieu_, Series).

27. Q; My cable box will not change channels with the

TV Guide On Screen'" system. W'hat's wrong?

A: There are several possibilities:

a) The incorrect cable box code was entered during TV Guide

On Screen _' initial setup. Redo initial setup.

b) The G-LINK '_' (IR blaster) cable may not be connected

properly (see page 25).

c) Tile cable box has no remote capability and is

incompatible.

28. Q; How do I resize or close the Info window?

A: Pressthe INFO button on the remote control to resize the

Info window. Pressthe INFO button again to close the

Info window.

29. Q; Is there a way to go directly to the next day's listings

widmut scrolling dlrough each time slot?

A: Yes. In LISTINGS, highlight the station for which you

want to look ahead and use the Channel Number buttons

on tile remote control to enter "24." Ill the resulting menu,

press • two times to scroll down to select the HOURS

AHEAD option, and then press ENTER. You also can use

the SKIP button on the remote control

30. Q; Why can't I record a show? All I get is snow or a blue

screen.

There are severalpossibilities (without a cahle box):

The recording unit was not connected or set up correctly.

The incorrect channel lineup was selected. PressTV

GUIDE and then I_ to highlight SETUP. Press• to

highlight "Change system settings," and then press

ENTER. Follow the on-screen prompts to select the correct

cha*mellineup.

31. Q; Why won't my VCR change channels and why does it

change to die wrong channel?

A: There :are two possibilities (with a cable box):

a) The VCR is not set on the correct output channel. Set the

VCR to 03, 04, or whichever output channel is set by your

cable system.

b) The VCR and/or cable box are hooked up incorrectl>

Refer to your VCR owner's manual or contact your Cahle

TV company for proper wiring procedures.

32. Q; Is Help available in the TV Guide On Screen'" system?

If so, how do I find it?

A: Yes. Highlight any of the five main Sen,ices (Listings,

Schedule, Recordings, Setup, Search) and press the INFO

key on tile remote control. An expanded Info Box displays

additional help information. Press INFO again to close the

box_

Help is also available ill a panel menu. Press INFO to

displayan expanded Info Box. PressINFO again to close

the box.

RECORD/REMIND

33. Q; Can I tune to adifferent channel while recording a

program?

A: No.

34. Q; How many programs can be scheduled for RECORD in

the GUIDE?

A: There is no limit to tile number of shows that call be

programmed into the schedule memor):

35. Q; Ifa program is scheduled to RECORD on a Regular

basis, does it count as five?

A: No, whether a program is scheduled ONCE,

REGULARLY, or WEEKLY, it only counts as one show ill

the RECORD stack memory.

36. Q; IfI have a power failure, will I need to reset the

recorded shows Ihave already programmed?

A: The start times and channel numbers of shows that have

been programmed will be retained ill the memo Uof the

TV Guide On Screen _"system. Titles will appear once

listings are restored.

37. Q! Can I set a Record or Remind event without

highlighting a show tide in the TV Guide On Screen'"

system?

A: Yes.TV Guide On Screen_Mhas a Manual Record and

Remind feature. Highlight SCHEDULE in the Sen,ice Bar,

and press MENU. Choose the event type, press ENTER,

and then enter the date, start and stop time, channel

number, and so forth.

38. Q; Vc'hat do the frequencies for Record and Remind mean?

A: Once--records/reminds the show one time.

Daily (mamlal only)--records the time, channel, input,

recorder combination Monday through Frida)<

Regularly-- records/reminds the show every time the show

airson the same channel and starts at the same time.

Weekly-- records/reminds the show each time the show

airs on tile same day of the week, on tile same channel and

starts at the same time.

Off (not cancel)--keeps tile show ill tile sdledule list but will

not record/remind tile show until the frequencyis changed.

#01E 097-1 2 566272HM195 102

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/B5, 5:05 PM [

;!_i!ii_i_i_ii_i_ii_ ,:ii!!_

iii!i<_i_i;,_;_;iiii_i!__ ii_

Lampunitreplacementandcare

Replacing the lamp unit

(User-replaceable component)

WARNING: RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK!

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, NEVER

REMOVE TV COVERS, EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED

HEREIN. REFERALL SERVICING NOT SPECIFIED IN

THIS MANUAL TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

Failure to follow this WARNING may result in death

or serious injury.

The light source for this TV is a mercury lamp with internal

atmospheric presstire that increases during use. The lamp has a

limited service life that varies depending on product use and

user settings.

As is generally the case with all projection TVs that use

projection lamps as a light source, the brighmess of the lamp in

this TV may vary somewhat over the expected service life and

will generally decrease over time. The average useful service life

for the lamp is approximately 8,000 hours in Low Power mode

or 6,000 hours in High Bright mode. See "Selecting the Lamp

mode" on page 75 for inf)_rmation on switching the lamp mode.

Because these are averages, some lamps will require earlier

replacement.

Note : Thelamp iswarranted only for the periods and to the

extent set forth in the Limited Warrantyapplicable to thisset,

which is a substantiallyshorterperiod of time than the average

useful serviceperiod. See "Limited United States Warranty"on

page 107or "Limited CanadaWarranty"onpage 108,as

applicable.

If you use the lamp beyond its service life:

•)qm may notice a redtiction in the colors and/or brighmess of

the picture; and

• the s[rength of the quartz glass in the lamp will be reduced

and the lamp may rupture (often making a loud noise when

this happens). If the lamp ruptures, the TV will not operate

until the lamp unit is replaced.

CAUTION: Alwayshandlethe lamp unitwithcam.

ThelampunitinthisTVwasdesignedfor safereplacement

byconsumers;however,ifthelampunit issubjectedto intentional

abuse(suchasexcessivemechanicalabuseor handlingbychildren

or pets),theunitmaybreak,exposingsharpedgesor pinchpoints.

When to replace the lamp unit

You should replace the lamp unit:

• if the picture darkens and/or colors fade;

• if the screen (lamp) does no[ light (LED indication #3, page

99); or

• if)_m hear a loud noise and the picture goes black, which

may indicate a lamp rupture (LED indication #3, page 99).

To obtain a replacement lamp unit:

•In the U.S.:

Inwarranty wvw.tacp.toshiba.com/service Calltoll-free

1-800-631-381l.

Outof www.ceaccessories.toshiba.com Consultyour

warranty consumer

electronicsdealer

foravailability.

" In Canada:

Contacta Toshibapads distributor by directing)/ourweb browser

to www, toshiba,ca, Click"Home Entedainment,"andthen click

"Suppolt."

Use the replacement lamp unit model listed below only.

Using any other lamp may cause damage to the TV

and/or lamp.

ICAUTION: Always replace with same ]

type lamp unit: Model No. D95-LMP I

(Stock no. 23311153)

#OlE 103-109 566272HM195 103

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 5:06 PM

103

[

Lampunitreplacementandcare(continued)

How to replace the lamp unit

WARNING: RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK!

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, NEVER

REMOVE TV COVERS, EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED

HEREIN. REFERALL SERVICING NOT SPECIFIED IN

THIS MANUAL TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

Failure to follow this WARNING may result in death

or serious injury.

Required tools: Lint-free gloves; manual screwdrivers (Phillips

and slotted).

Optional tool: 5/16" nut driver

1. Turn offthe TV and unplug the power cord.

WARNING: Eyedamage may result from

directly viewing the light produced by this

lamp. Always turn off tile TV and unplug the

power cord before opening the lamp unit door.

2. STOP! Allow the lamp to cool for at least one (1) hour

before replacing it.

CAUTION: HOT SURFACE! /\

The temperature of the lamp /4"5_,_

immediately after use /_ \

/ exceeds 392°F (200°C). Z_ '&

Touchingthe lamp before it has cooled will result in

severe bums. ALLOW THE LAMP TO COOL FORAT

LEASTONE (1) HOUR BEFOREREPLACING IT.

3. On the lamp unit door oil the side of the TV, loosen the screw

using a manual screwdriver,and then remove the lamp unit

door.

TV back

Lamp unit door detail loosen screw using

manual screwdriver

4. Using amanual screwdriver,loosen the two screwson the lamp

unit.

i0 .....

%.. \

X."{_!:)*

Lamp unit screws

WARNING: RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK!

Thelampunit dooris providedwith an

interlockto reducethe riskof electricshockand excessive

ultravioletradiation,Never defeat its purposeor attempt

to servicewithoutremovingthe lamp unit door

completely.Failureto follow this WARNINGmayresultin

deathor seriousinjury.

5. (;rasp the lamp unit handle and gently pull the lamp unit

straight out of the TV. Set the old lamp unit aside (see

"Disposing of the used lamp unit" on page 105).

Note: Wear soft, lint-free gloves

when replacing the lamp unit.

#01E 103-1 9 566272HM195 104

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 5:07 PM F

Lampunitreplacementandcare(continued)

How to replace the lamp unit (continued)

6. Carefully insert the new lamp unit straight into the TV until

it is fully seated.

Note :

•Neversubjectthe lampunit to excessiveshock.

•Nevertouch thelamp unitg/assor otherwL_eget it di/?y

Doingsomayaffect theimage qualityand reducethese/vieelife of

thelamp See"Cleaningthelamp unit glass"belo_z

CLEANING THE LAMP UNIT GLASS

Ifyou accidentallytouchthe lampunit glassor otherwise

get it dirty,wipe it with a lint-freelens cleaningcloth (such

asa cloth for cleaningcameralensesor eyeglasses).

CAUTION: NEVERclean a hot lamp with

any type of flammable liquid or aerosol

cleaning agent. Many ordinarycleaning agents

(suchas glasscleaners)contain chemicalsthat maybe

flammableat certaintemperatures.Ifthe lampumt is notallowed

to cool for at leastone (1) hour.suchchemicalsmayignite.

i !

= |

7. Using a manual screwdriver, tighten the two lamp unit screws.

Note: Hand-tighten only. Do not use anelectricscrewdnver:

Lamp unit screws

(usemanual screwdriveronly)

NOTE :Makesure the lampunitand screws

are installedsecurely;otherwise,theTV maynot

turn on andthe lamp life maybeshortened.

8. Reattach the lamp unit door, making sure to insert the hooks

on the left side of the lamp unit door inside the opening in

the TV cabinet.

Insert the hooks inside

the TV cabinet opening.

Lamp unit door

9. Replace the screw and hand-tighten using a manual

screwdriver.

Lamp unit door NOTE :Makesure

the lampunit dooris

installedsecurely;otherwise,

the TVmaynot turn on.

10. Plug in the power cord and turn on the TV. After the initial

warmup period (which may take severalseconds for full

picture brightness), the TV should operate normally. If any of

the f_llowing conditions exist, turn oft the TV, unplug the

power cord, and repeat steps 1-9 to ensure that the lamp unit

and lamp unit door are installed correctly:

• No picture • Dark picture • TV will not turn on

If',after repeating steps 1-9, the problem still exists:

• In the U.S., call TACP consumer solutions at 1-800-631-

3811.

• In Canada, locate the nearest Toshiba authorized service

depo[ by directing )_mrweb browser to www.toshiba.ca;

click "Home Entertainment," and then click "Support."

Disposing of the used lamp unit

•Place the used lamp unit in the eruptT box from the new unit.

• Keep the lamp unit out of reach of children and pets.

CAUTION: Alwayshandlethe lampunit withcare.

ThelampunitinthisTVwasdesignedfor safereplacementby

consumers;however,if thelampunit issubjectedto intentionalor

accidentalabuse(suchasexcessivemechanicalabuseor handlingby

childrenor pets),theunit maybreak,exposingsharpedgesorpinchpoints.

• Dispose of the used lamp unit by the approved method for

}_mr area.

NOTE:The lamp unit contains mercury. Disposal of mercury may

beregulatedduetoenvironmentalconsiderations.Fordisposalor

recyclinginformation,contactyourlocalauthoritiesortheElectronicIndustries

Alliance(www.eiae,org),

#01E 103-109 566272HM195 105

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28105, 5:08 PM F

Specifications

NOTE:

•This model complies with the specifications listed below.

•Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.

• This model may not be compatible with features and/or specifications that may be added in the future.

Television System

NTSC standard

ATSC standard (8VSB)

Digital Cable (64 QAM, 256 QAM; in-the-clear, tmencrypted*)

_Encryptedchannelscan be viewed on this TV

L/SlRg a CubleCARD Tbl Seepage 12 for details

Channel Coverage

VHF: 2 through 13

UHF: 14 through 69

Cable TV: Mid band (A-8 through A-l, A through I)

Super band (J through W)

Hyper band (AA through ZZ, AAA, BBB)

Ultra band (65 through 94, 100 through 135)

Power Source

120 V AC, 60 Hz

Power Consumption

265 W(average)

38 W in standby mode (Using a CableCARD")

34 W in standby mode (Without a CableCARD"

Audio Power

15W+ 15W

Speaker Type

56HM 195: Two 4-3/4-inch (12cm) round

62HM 195: Four 4-3/4-inch (12cm) round

72HM 195: Four 4-3/4-inch (12cm) round

Video/Audio Terminals

S-VIDEO INPUT:

Y: 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.

C:0.286 V(p-p) (burstsignal), 75 ohm

VIDEO/AUDIO INPUT:

VIDEO: 1V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.

AUDIO: 150 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent,

22 k ohm or greater)

ColorStream ('_)(component video) HD INPUT:

Y: iV(p-p), 75 ohm

PR: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 ohm

PB: 0.7 V(p-p), 75 ohm

AUDIO: 150 mV(rms), 22 k ohm or greater

Suggested formats: 1080i, 480p, 480i, 720p

** E EDID Enhanced Extended Display Identification

Video/Audio Terminals (continued)

HDMI _" INPUT:

HDMI compliant (type A connector)

HDCP compliant

E-EDID** compliant

Suggested formats: 1080i, 480p, 480i, 720p

HDMI Audio: 2-channel PCM; 32/44.1/48 kHz sampling

frequency; 16/20/24 bits per sample

VIDEO/AUDIO OUTPUT (also for recording):

VIDEO: 1 V(p-p), 75 ohm, negative sync.

AUDIO: 150 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent,

2.2 k ohm or less)

VARIABLE AUDIO OUTPUT:

0-300 mV(rms) (30% modulation equivalent,

2.2 k ohm or less)

G-LINK%

3 V(p-p), 3.5 mm mono socket (IR blaster cables supplied)

IEEE1394 INPUT/OUTPUT:

IEEE1394 compliant 4-pin

DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT:

Optical type

TheaterNet'" OUTPUT:

3 V(p-p), 10 k ohm

Dimensions

56HM195:

62HM 195:

72HM195:

Width:

Height:

Depth:

Width:

Height:

Depth:

Width:

Height:

Depth:

51-11/16 inches (1,313 mm)

36-3116 inches (919 mm)

16-15/16 inches (430 mm)

57-1116 inches (1,450 ram)

39-114 inches (997 ram)

18-314 inches (476 mm)

65- 13/16 inches (1,672 mm)

44-1116 inches (1,119 ram)

21-11/16 inches (551 ram)

Weight

56HM195:90 lbs (40.8 kg)

62HM195:103 lbs (46.7 kg)

72HM195:122 lbs (55.3 kg)

Supplied Accessories

•Two dual-wand IR blaster cables

•Remote control with two size "AA" alkaline batteries

•Owner's Manual (this book)

Optional Stands:

56HM195:ST5685

62HM 195:ST6285

72HM195:ST7285

#01E 103-1 9 566272HM195 106

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/B5, 5:08 PM [

LimitedUnitedStatesWarranty

for DLPTMTelevisionModels

Toshiba America Consumer Products. L.L.C. ("TACP") makes the following

limited warranties to original consumers in tile United States.

THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL

CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS DLPTM

TELEVISION AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER

PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.

DLPT"TELEVISIONS PURCHASED IN TH EU.S.A. AND USED ANYWHERE

OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A., INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA

AND MEXICO, ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.

DLPTr'TELEVISIONS PURCHASED ANYWHERE OUTSIDE OF THE U.S.A.,

INCLU DING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, CANADA AND MEXICO, AND USED

IN THE U.S.A.,ARE NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.

Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labor

TACP warrants this DLPTHTelevision and its parts against defects in materials

or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of original retail

purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL, AT TACP'S OPTION,

REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PART WITH A NEW OR

REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTS OR

LABOR. During this period. TACP Authorized Service Station personnel will

come to your home when warranty service is required. Depending on the

type of repair required, the selvice will either be performed in your home or

the DLPT''Television will be taken to a TACP Authorized Service Station for

repair and returned to your home at no cost to you.

Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Lamp Unit

TACP warrants the original lamp unit contained in this DLPT''Television

against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after

the date of original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TACP WILL,

AT TACP'S OPTION, EXCHANGE A DEFECTIVE LAMP UNIT WITH A

NEW OR REFURBISHED LAMP UNIT WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU.

LABOR CHARGES FOR LAMP UNIT REPLACEMENT ARE YOUR

RESPONSIBILITY AND ARE NOT COVERED UNDER THIS

WARRANTY. The lamp unit is a user replaceable component.

Rental Units

Tile warranty for DLPTr'lTelevision rental units begins on tile date of tile first

rental or thilty (30) days after the date of shipment to the rental firm.

whichever COMBSfirst.

Limited Warranty for Commercial Units

TACP warrants DLPTMTelevisions, including the lamp units contained therein.

that are sold and used for commercial purposes as follows: all parts are

warranted against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of ninety

(90) days after the date of original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD,

TACP WILL, AT TACP'S OPTION, REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE

PART WITH A NEW OR REFURBISHED PART WITHOUT CHARGE TO

YOU.

Owner's Manual and Product Registration

Read this owner's manual thoroughly before operating this DLPTr'ltelevision.

Complete and mail the enclosed product registlation card or register your

DLPTr'lTelevision online at www.tacp.toshiba.com/service as soon as

possible. By registering your DLPTr'lTelevisionyou will enable TACP to bring

you new products specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to

contact you in the unlikely event a safety notification is required under tile

Consumer Product Safety Act. Failure to register your product does not

diminish your warranty rights.

Your Responsibility

THE ABOVE WARRANTI ESARE S UBJECT TO THE FOLLOWI NG

CONDITIONS:

(1] You must retain your original bill of sale or provide other proof of

purchase..

(2) All warranty selvicing of this DLPTMTelevision must be pedormed by an

Authorized TACP Service Station.

(3] The waRanties from TACP areeffective only if this DLPTr'lTelevisionis

purchased and operated in the Continental U.S.A.or PueIto Rico.

(4] Labor service charges for set installation, setup, adjustment of customer

controls, and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered

by this warranty. Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna

systems, misaligned satellite dishes, cable television distribution. VCRs,

DVD players/recorders, personal computer level IEEE1394 devices, and

any other connected signal source device are your responsibility..

(5] Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as limited

above, and do not extend to any DLPTr'lTelevision or parts that have

been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the DLPTr'lTelevision or

parts caused by fires, misuse, accident. Acts of God (such as lightning

or fluctuations in electric powe0, improper installation, improper

maintenance, or use in violation of instructions furnished by TACP: use

or malfunction through simultaneous use of this D LPTr'lTelevision and

connected equipment: or to units that have been modified or had the

serial number removed, altered, defaced, or rendered illegible.

How to Obtain Warranty Service

If.after following all of tile Bperating instructions in this manualaBd reviewiBg

tile section titled "Troubleshooting," you find that SBIViCBis needed:

(1) To find the nearest TACP Authorized Service Station. visit TACP's

website at wv_nN.tacp.toshiba.com/service or contact TACP's

Consumer Solution Center toll free at 1 800 631 3811.

(2) You must present your original bill of sale or other proof of purchase to

the TACP Authorized SBIViCBStation.

For additional information, visit TACP's web site:

www.tacp.toshiba.eom.

ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATEOF THE

U.S.A., INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,

ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED

WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY

WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY STATEOF THE U.S.A. AS

HEREBY LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND

IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES, AGREEMENTS,

AND SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TACP WITH RESPECT TO THE

REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL

TACP BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS

INTERRUPTION, OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF RECORDED

DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DLPTM

TELEVISION).

No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company is authorized to change,

modify, or extend the teRR8of these warranties in any manner whatsoever.

The time within which an action must be commenced to enforce any

obligation of TACP arising under the warranty or under any statute or law of

the United States or any state thereof is hereby limited to ninety (90) days

from the date you discover, or should have discovered, the defect. This

]imitationdoes not apply to implied warranties arising under the law of any

state of the U.S.A.

THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU

MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE

TO STATE IN THE U.S.A. SOME STATES OFTHE U.S.A. DO NOT ALLOW

LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY,

WHEN AN ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE EXCLUSION OR

LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

THEREFORE, THE ABOVE PROVISIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU

UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES. 05

#01E 103-109 566272HM195 107

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/B5, 5:08 PM r

LimitedCanadaWarranty

for DLPTMTelevisionModels

Toshiba of Canada Limited ("TCE') makes the following limited warranties to

original consumers in Canada.

THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES EXTEND TO THE ORIGINAL

CONSUMER PURCHASER OR ANY PERSON RECEIVING THIS DLPTM

TELEVISION AS A GIFT FROM THE ORIGINAL CONSUMER

PURCHASER AND TO NO OTHER PURCHASER OR TRANSFEREE.

PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN THE U.S.A.AND USED IN CANADA ARE

NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.

PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN CANADA AND USED IN THE U.S.A. ARE

NOT COVERED BY THESE WARRANTIES.

Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Parts and Labor*

TCL warrants this DLPTutelevision television and its parts against defects in

materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of

original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD. TCL WILL. AT TCES

OPTION, REPAIROR REPLACE A DEFECTIVEPARTWITH A NEW OR

REFURBISHED PARTWITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU FOR PARTSOR

LABOR. TCL Authorized Selvice Depot personnel will come to your home

when warranty selvicB is required. Depending on the type of repair required,

either the service will be performed in your home or tile set will be taken to

the TCL Authorized Selvice Depot for repair and returned to your home at

no cost to you. IN HOME SERVICE ONLY APPLIES WITHIN 100

KILOMETERS OF AN AUTHORIZED TCL SERVICE DEPOT.

Limited One (1) Year Warranty on Lamp Unit*

TCL warrants the lamp unit inthis DLPTutelevision against defects in

materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year after the date of

original retail purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD, TCL WILL, AT TCES

OPTION, EXCHANGE A DEFECTIVELAMP UNIT WITH A NEW OR

REFURBISHED LAMP UNIT WITHOUT CHARGE TO YOU. LABOR

CHARGES FOR LAMP UNIT REPLACEMENT ARE NOT COVERED

UN DERWARRANTY. The lamp unit is a user replaceable component.

Rental Units

Tile warranty for rental units, inchlding tile lamp units contaiBed thereiB.

begins with the date of first rental or thilty [30) days from the date of

shipment to the rental firm. whichever comes first.

*Limited Warranty for Commercial Units

TCL warrants DLPTHtelevisions, including the lamp units contained therein.

sold and used for commercial purposes as follows: all paits are warranted

against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days

after the date of original purchase. DURING THIS PERIOD.TCL WILL. AT

TCES OPTION, REPAIROR REPLACE A DEFECTIVEPARTWITH A NEW OR

REFURBISHED PARTWITHOUT CHARGETO YOU. ON SITE SERVICE

ONLYAPPLIES WITHIN 100 KILOMETERS OF AN AUTHORIZED TCL

SERVICE DEPO]_

Owner's Manual and Product Registration

Read this owner's manual thoroughly before operating this DLPTr'ltelevision.

registering your product you will enable TCL bring you new products

specifically designed to meet your needs and help us to contact you in the

unlikely event a safety notification is required under tile Consumer Product

Safety Act. Failure to register your product does not diminish your warranty

rights.

Your Responsibility

THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING

CONDITIONS:

(1) You IT1ustprovide your bill of sale or other proof of purchase.

(2) All warranty selvicing of this DLPT''television must be pedormed by an

Authorized TCL Service Depot.

(3] These warranties from TCL are effectiveonly if the DLPT''television is

purchased in Canadafrom an authorized TCL dealerand operated in

Canada.

(4] Labor charges for installation, setup, adjustment of customer controls.

and installation or repair of antenna systems are not covered by these

warranties. Reception problems caused by inadequate antenna systems

are your responsibility.

(5] Warranties extend only to defects in materials or workmanship as limited

above, and do not extend to any DLPT''television or pairs that have

been lost or discarded by you or to damage to the television or parts

caused by fires, misuse, accident. Acts of God (such as lightning or

fluctuations in electric power], improper installation, improper

maintenance, or use in violation of instructions furnished by TCL: use or

malfunction through simultaneous use of this product and connected

equipment: or to units that have been modified or had the serial number

removed, altered, defaced, or rendered illegible.

How to Obtain Warranty Services

If.after following all of tile operating instructions in this manualaBd checkiBg

tile "Troubleshooting" section, you find that SBIViCBis needed:

(1) To find the nearest TCL Authorized Seivice Depot. visit TCEs web site at

www.toshiba.ca.

(2) Present your bill of sale or other proof of purchase to tile Authorized

SBIViCBDepot.

For additional information, visit TCL's web site:

www.toshiba.ca

ALL WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY PROVINCE OF

CANADA, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,

ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE LIMITED

WARRANTIES SET FORTH ABOVE. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF ANY

WARRANTIES IMPLIED BY THE LAW OF ANY PROVINCE OF CANADA

AS HEREBY LIMITED, THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE

AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES,

AGREEMENTS, AND SIMILAR OBLIGATIONS OF TCL WITH RESPECT

TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY PARTS. IN NO EVENT

SHALL TCL BE LIABLE FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL

DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOST PROFITS,

BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR MODIFICATION OR ERASURE OF

RECORDED DATA CAUSED BY USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE

THIS PRODUCT).

No person, agent, distributor, dealer, or company is authorized to change,

modify, or extend the terms of these warranties in any manner whatsoever.

The time within which action must be commenced to enforce any obligation

of TCL arising under this warranty or under any law of Canada or of any

province thereof ishereby limited to 90 days from tile date you discover, or

should have discovered, tile defect. This limitation does not apply to implied

warranties arising under the law of any province of Canada.

THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU

MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM

PROVINCE TO PROVINCE IN CANADA. SOME PROVINCES OF

CANADA DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN

IMPLIED WARRANTY, LIMITATIONS ON THE TIME WITHIN WHICH AN

ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT, OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF

INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES; THEREFORE, THE

ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU

UNDER SUCH CIRCUMSTANCES.

#01E 103-1 9 566272HM195 108

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 5:08 PM F

A copy of the GPL source code in this product may be obtained by

contacting Toshiba Consumer Solutions at (800)631-3811. There will be a

charge to cover the costs of providing the source code.

A copy of the LGPL source code in this product may be obtained by

contacting Toshiba Consumer Solutions at (800)631-3811. There will be a

charge to cover the costs of providing the source code.

reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are

met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice.

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation

and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of The NBtBSD Foundation nor the names of its

contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived ffmB

this software without specified prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC.

AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;

OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY

THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR

TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY

WAY OUT OF TH E USE OF TH IS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This product inchides software developed by tile OpenSSL Project for else in

the OpenSSL Toolkit (llttp://www.openssI.org).

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young

(eay,_cryptsoft.com).

reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice.

this list of conditions and tile following disclaimer in the documentation

and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All adveltising materials mentioning features or use of this software must

display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software

developed by the OpenSSL Projectfor elsein the OpenSSL Toolkit

(http://openssl.org).

4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "Open SSL Project" must not be used

to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior

written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl

core,_2openssl.org.

5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpBnSSL" nor may

"Open SSE' appear in their nameswithout prior written permission of the

OpenSSL Project.

6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following

acknowledgement: "This product includes software developed by the

OpenSSL Project for elsein the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org)."

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT'AS IS" AND

ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND

FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT

SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECTOR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FORANY

DIRECT,INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,

DATA,OR PROFITS;OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED

AND ON ANY THEORYOF UABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,STRICT

LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes

cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This

product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

This package is an SSL implementation written by EricYoung

(eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with

Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use

so long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions

apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES,

etc.,code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this

distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is

Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

code are notto be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric

Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library

used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in

documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of

conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice.

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation

and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. ANadveltising materials mentioning features or use of this software must

display the foNowing acknowledgement: "This product includes

cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay,_0cryptsoft.com)." The

word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the Nbrarybeing

used are not ciTptographic related.

4. If you include any Windows specific code (or derivative thereo0 from the

apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:

"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson

(tjh_ cryptosoft.com)."

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY

EXPRESSOR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED

TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL

THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;

OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY

THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR

TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY

WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The license and distribution terms for

any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed,

i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution

license (including the GNU Public License).

#01E 103-109 566272HM195 109

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 5:09 PM

109

Antenna cables .........................................................................11

Antenna input configuration .............................................../41

Audio player ...............................................................................90

Audio quality adjustments ....................................................85

Audio system connection ......................................................20

Auto aspect ratio ......................................................................74

Auto power off ...........................................................................92

AVHD .....................................................................................23, 50

Back of the TV ...........................................................................10

Banner, Channel Browser _'_..................................................69

Blocking channels ....................................................................95

Cable box connection ......................................................14, 16

CableCARD TM.............................................................................12

CableCARD T_,connection .....................................................12

CableClear TMDNR ....................................................................80

Cables ...........................................................................................11

Camcorder connection ...........................................................13

CH AY buttons ..................................................................42, 71

CH RTN button ..........................................................................71

Channel Browser _ ...................................................................69

Channel Number buttons ..............................................42, 71

Channel programming:

Automatic programming ..................................................42

Manually adding and deleting .......................................43

Cinema mode .............................................................................75

Closed captions ........................................................................82

Color temperature ....................................................................80

ColorStream 4_......................................................................10, 17

Connecting devices ..........................................................12-25

CompactFlash 4_memory cards .....................................87, 88

Component video cables ......................................................11

Component video (ColorStream 4_)..............................10, 17

Device connections ..........................................................12-25

Defaults, restore TV factory .................................................52

Digital Audio Out ......................................................................20

Digital signal meter .................................................................52

DNR (Digital Noise Reduction) ..........................................80

Dolby Digital ........................................................................20, 86

Double-window POP feature ...............................................76

DVD player connection ...................................................16, 17

D-VHS ....................................................................................23, 50

DVl connection ..........................................................................19

Dynamic contrast .....................................................................81

EFGHIJ

EIA-775 .........................................................................................22

FAV SCAN button ..............................................................44, 78

Favorite channels ..............................................................44, 78

Features, TV ...................................................................................7

Focus .............................................................................................86

Front of the TV ..............................................................................9

GameTimer T" ..............................................................................96

G-LINK T'_connection ..............................................................25

HDMP audio mode ................................................................50

HDMP connection .................................................................19

IEEE1394 ......................................................................................22

INPUT button .............................................................................67

Input lock .....................................................................................95

Installation, care, and service ............................................3, 4

Installation, setup ........................................................................8

Integrated digital tuning ...........................................................7

IR blaster .....................................................................................21

JPEG .......................................................................................87-90

Labeling video inputs .............................................................68

Lamp mode .................................................................................75

Lamp unit replacement ..............................................103-105

Language selection .................................................................41

Last mode memory feature ..................................................92

LED indications ...............................................................8, 9, 99

Locking video inputs ...............................................................95

LOCKS menu ..............................................................................93

Channels, blocking .............................................................95

Enable rating blocking ......................................................94

Front Panel lock (control panel lock) ..........................96

GameTimer _ .........................................................................96

New PIN code ......................................................................93

Unlocking programs temporarily ..................................95

Video inputs, locking .........................................................95

#01E 110-1 1 566272HM195 110

Black

E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 5:09 PM r

Memory cards .....................................................................87-90

Memory Stick TMmemory cards .....................................87, 88

Menu system .......................................................................35, 36

MMC memory cards .........................................................87, 88

M P3.........................................................................................87-90

MPEG-2 digital video signals ..............................................22

MPEG noise reduction ...........................................................81

MTS feature ................................................................................84

MUTE button ..............................................................................84

OPQ

ON/OFF timer ............................................................................91

Optical audio cable .................................................................11

Optical audio output format ................................................86

Panel lock ....................................................................................96

Picture adjustments:

Color temperature ...............................................................80

Picture mode .........................................................................79

Picture quality .......................................................................79

Picture-out-picture (POP):

FAV SCAN button ................................................................78

SPLIT button ..........................................................................76

Picture scroll ...............................................................................74

Picture size selection ..............................................................72

Picture viewer ............................................................................87

POWER button ..........................................................................31

Problems with TV ...............................................................97, 98

Quick RestaW M..........................................................................51

RECALL button .........................................................................84

Remote control:

Battery installation ..............................................................28

Device code table ........................................................33, 34

Effective range ......................................................................27

Functional key chart ....................................................29, 30

Learning about the buttons ............................................26

Operational feature reset .................................................32

Programming ........................................................................31

Searching and sampling the code ...............................31

Volume lock feature ...........................................................32

Restore TV factory defaults ..................................................52

Safety, care, installation, and service .............................2-5

SAP sound ...................................................................................84

Satellite receiver connection ...............................................15

Scrolling the TheaterWide _ picture ...................................74

SD (Secure Digital T") memory cards ..........................87, 88

Service .............................................................................................4

Setup, TV ...............................................................................36, 41

Setup, TV Guide On Screen _'_system ...............................37

Sleep timer ..................................................................................91

Speakers ON/OFF ....................................................................86

Specifications ...........................................................................106

SRS 3D .........................................................................................86

SRS WOW _' ................................................................................86

StableSound :_.............................................................................85

Stereo sound ..............................................................................8/4

Sub-bass (SBS) .........................................................................85

SurfLock T_'....................................................................................71

S-video cables ...........................................................................11

Symbio _ AVH D recorder ...............................................23, 50

System status .............................................................................52

TheaterNet T_control ...............................................................21

TheaterNet _ DEVICE and CONTROL buttons ............./46

TheaterNet 7_'IR device codes ......................................./47-49

TheaterNet T_setup ................................................................../45

TheaterWide 4_picture size ....................................................73

Time and date setting .............................................................50

Troubleshooting ..................................................................97, 98

TruBass .........................................................................................86

TV/VIDEO button ......................................................................67

TV control panel ..................................................................9, 36

TV Guide On Screen _M.................................................8, 37, 53

V-Chip blocking (Locks menu) ....................................93-96

VCR connection .................................................................13-18

Video cables ...............................................................................11

Video input labels ....................................................................68

Video input lock ........................................................................95

VOLUME button .......................................................................96

W, X

Warranty ............................................................................10Z 108

WOW _, SRS_R;......................................................................................................................................86

xD-Picture Card _ ...............................................................87, 88

#01E 110-111 566272HM195 111

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/B5, 5:09 PM

111

TOSHIBA AMERICA CONSUMER PRODUCTS, L.L.C.

HEAD OFFICE:82 TOTOWA ROAD.WAYNE, NJ 07470. U.S.A.

NATIONAL SERVICEDIVISION:1420 B TOSHIBA DRIVE.LEBANON.TN 37087, U.S.A.

TOSHIBA OF CANADA LTD.

HEAD OFFICE:191 McNABB STREET,MARKHAM, ONTARIO, L3R 8H2. CANADA TEL: (905) 470 5/400

SERVICECENTERS:

TORONTO:191 McNABB STREET.MARKHAM, ONTARIO L3R8H2. CANADA TEL: (905) 470 5/400

MONTREAL: 18050 TRANS CANADA. KIRKLAND, QUEBEC.HgJ 4A1. CANADA TEL: (514) 390 7766

VANCOUVER:22171 FRASERWOODWAY, RICHMOND. B.C.,V6W 1J5.CANADA TEL: (604) 303 2500

MAN UFACTUREDBY

TOSHIBA AMERICA CONSUMER PRODUCTS, L.L.C.

CableClear, ColorStream,StableSound, and TheaterWide are registered trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.

Channel Browser, GameTimer.Sud_Lock,Symbio, Quick Restalt, and TheaterNet are trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products. L.L.C.

Digital Light Processing, DLPT'Iand the DLP medallion are trademarks of Texas Instruments.

PRINTEDIN USA

{05-08}

TOSHIBA

#01E 112 566272HM195 112

Black

(E) 56/62/72HM195

7/28/05, 5:09 PM F

Toshiba 56HM195 User Manual DLP PTV Manuals And Guides L0520078

TOSHIBA DLP Television Manual L0520078 TOSHIBA DLP Television Owner's Manual, TOSHIBA DLP Television installation guides

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation